1 #LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
7 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
9 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
10 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
11 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
12 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
13 % the documentation team
14 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
16 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
17 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
19 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
20 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
22 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
24 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
25 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
27 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
28 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
29 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
30 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
32 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
36 % define a short command for \textvisiblespace
37 \newcommand{\spce}{\textvisiblespace}
39 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
40 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
42 % for customized page headers/footers
43 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
45 % change header rule width
46 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
48 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
49 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
50 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
52 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
54 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
55 \use_default_options false
60 \maintain_unincluded_children false
62 \language_package default
67 \font_typewriter default
69 \font_default_family default
70 \use_non_tex_fonts false
76 \default_output_format default
78 \bibtex_command default
79 \index_command default
83 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
84 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
88 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
89 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
90 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
95 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
96 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
99 \use_package amsmath 1
100 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package cancel 0
103 \use_package mathdots 1
104 \use_package mathtools 0
105 \use_package mhchem 1
106 \use_package stackrel 0
107 \use_package stmaryrd 0
108 \use_package undertilde 0
110 \cite_engine_type numerical
114 \paperorientation portrait
118 \notefontcolor #0000ff
135 \paragraph_separation indent
136 \paragraph_indentation default
137 \quotes_language english
140 \paperpagestyle default
141 \tracking_changes true
142 \output_changes false
146 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
148 \author 2090807402 "usti"
162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
164 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
165 send them to the LyX Documentation mailing list:
166 \begin_inset CommandInset href
168 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
179 \begin_inset Newline newline
183 \begin_inset Newline newline
187 \begin_inset Note Note
190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
191 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
192 \begin_inset Newline newline
197 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
205 \begin_layout Standard
206 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
207 LatexCommand tableofcontents
214 \begin_layout Chapter
218 \begin_layout Section
222 \begin_layout Standard
223 LyX is a document preparation system.
224 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar \-
225 scripts, publishable books, business
226 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
227 It is unlike most other
228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
235 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
237 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
250 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
253 pt type, left justified, 5
254 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
262 LyX takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
266 \begin_layout Standard
267 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
272 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
276 \begin_layout Standard
281 manual describes several things in addition to LyX's philosophy: most important
282 ly, the format of all of the manuals.
283 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
284 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
290 manual describes that, too.
293 \begin_layout Section
297 \begin_layout Standard
298 Like most applications, LyX has the familiar menu bar across the top of
300 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
301 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
305 \begin_layout Standard
306 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
307 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
308 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
310 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
311 only a vertical scrollbar.
312 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
313 The first case is large images.
314 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
315 image and use the option
321 LaTeX and LyX options
324 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
326 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
327 this doesn't work for equations yet.
330 \begin_layout Standard
331 For a brief description of all LyX menus and toolbar buttons, have a look
337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
339 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
346 \begin_layout Section
350 \begin_layout Standard
351 The help system consists of the LyX manuals.
352 You can read all of the manuals from inside LyX.
353 Just select the manual you want to read from the
360 \begin_layout Section
362 \begin_inset CommandInset label
364 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
371 \begin_layout Standard
372 Almost all features of LyX can be configured via the menu
374 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
378 \begin_inset Index idx
381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
387 LyX is able to inspect your system to see what programs, LaTeX document
388 classes and LaTeX packages are available.
389 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
391 Although this configuration has already been done when LyX was installed
392 on your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
393 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
397 \begin_inset space \space{}
400 new LaTeX classes, and which are not seen by LyX.
401 To force LyX to re-inspect your system, you should use
403 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
407 \begin_inset Index idx
410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
411 Reconfiguration of LyX
416 You should then restart LyX to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
419 \begin_layout Section
421 \begin_inset CommandInset label
423 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
430 \begin_layout Standard
431 You can edit documents in LyX without having LaTeX installed, but you will
432 not be able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it
434 However, some LyX documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
435 PDFs and the like, and every LyX document can always be output as plain
439 \begin_layout Standard
440 Some document classes may depend upon specific LaTeX or DocBook classes
442 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
443 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
446 \begin_layout Standard
447 The LaTeX packages that LyX has found on your system are listed in a file
448 you can view from the menu
450 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
469 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
470 reconfigure LyX (menu
472 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
476 \begin_inset Note Note
479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
480 The two braces in the TeX Code box prevent that the term
481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
488 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
489 More about TeX Code is described in section
494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
496 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
500 , the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section
505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
507 reference "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
517 \begin_inset Index idx
520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
521 Reconfiguration of LyX
526 See section 5.1 of the
530 manual for more information on installing additional LaTeX packages.
533 \begin_layout Chapter
537 \begin_layout Section
538 Basic File Operations
539 \begin_inset Index idx
542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
551 \begin_layout Standard
556 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
557 in addition to some more advanced operations:
560 \begin_layout Itemize
572 \begin_layout Itemize
586 \begin_layout Itemize
598 \begin_layout Itemize
604 \begin_layout Itemize
616 \begin_layout Itemize
626 \begin_layout Itemize
640 \begin_layout Itemize
650 \begin_layout Itemize
656 \begin_layout Itemize
662 \begin_layout Itemize
668 arg "dialog-show print"
674 \begin_layout Itemize
680 \begin_layout Standard
681 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
682 a few minor differences.
685 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
696 command lists the available templates.
697 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
698 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
699 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
701 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
707 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
714 \begin_layout Standard
715 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
747 Unless you tell LyX to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank
748 space is just that — a big, blank space.
756 \begin_layout Standard
777 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
782 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
784 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar \@.
802 will reload the document from disk.
803 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
804 and want to restore it to the last save.
813 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
814 them as your changes.
817 \begin_layout Section
818 Basic Editing Features
819 \begin_inset Index idx
822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
829 \begin_inset CommandInset label
831 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
838 \begin_layout Standard
839 Like most modern word processors, LyX can perform cut and paste operations
840 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
841 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
842 The next four sections cover the basic LyX editing features and how to
844 We will start with cut and paste.
847 \begin_layout Standard
848 As you might expect, the
852 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
853 various other editing features.
854 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
858 \begin_layout Itemize
872 \begin_layout Itemize
886 \begin_layout Itemize
900 \begin_layout Itemize
910 \begin_layout Itemize
920 \begin_layout Itemize
936 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
942 \begin_layout Standard
943 The first three are self-explanatory.
945 \begin_inset Index idx
948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
954 You can also copy text between LyX and other programs by cut, copy and paste.
963 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
966 \begin_layout Standard
969 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
974 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
980 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
989 will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
991 A new paragraph is started when there is a blank line in the file.
1000 , the text is inserted as Paragraphs, where the line breaks of the text
1001 will start a new paragraph.
1004 \begin_layout Standard
1005 \begin_inset Index idx
1008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1015 \begin_inset Index idx
1018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1026 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1028 \begin_inset space ~
1032 \begin_inset space ~
1040 \begin_inset space ~
1044 \begin_inset space ~
1050 Once you have found a word or expression, LyX selects it.
1055 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1058 \begin_inset space ~
1067 \begin_inset space ~
1072 button to skip the current word.
1076 \begin_inset space ~
1081 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1085 \begin_inset space ~
1090 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1092 If the toggle is set, searching for
1093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1104 will not match the word
1105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1119 Match whole words only
1121 option can be used to force LyX to only find complete words, e.
1122 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1150 LyX offers also an advanced
1153 \begin_inset space ~
1157 \begin_inset space ~
1162 feature that is described in sec.
1163 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1169 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1176 \begin_layout Standard
1177 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1178 \begin_inset space \space{}
1182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1186 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1190 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1192 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1197 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1204 \begin_layout Standard
1205 The content of an inset is selected using the shortcut
1208 arg "inset-select-all"
1214 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1217 selects the whole document.
1220 \begin_layout Section
1222 \begin_inset Index idx
1225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1232 \begin_inset Index idx
1235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1242 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1244 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1251 \begin_layout Standard
1252 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1253 LyX has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1256 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1259 or the toolbar button
1265 to undo some mistake.
1266 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1268 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1271 or the toolbar button
1278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1285 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1286 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1289 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1292 \begin_layout Standard
1293 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1302 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1303 This is a consequence of the 100
1304 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1307 step undo limit mentioned above.
1310 \begin_layout Standard
1319 work on almost everything in LyX.
1320 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1324 \begin_layout Section
1326 \begin_inset Index idx
1329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1338 \begin_layout Standard
1339 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1342 \begin_layout Enumerate
1347 \begin_layout Itemize
1352 once anywhere in the edit window.
1353 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1357 \begin_layout Enumerate
1362 \begin_layout Itemize
1368 LyX marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1371 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1374 to create a copy of the text in LyX's buffer (and the clipboard).
1377 \begin_layout Itemize
1378 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into LyX using
1380 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1387 \begin_layout Enumerate
1388 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1392 \begin_layout Standard
1393 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1394 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1398 \begin_layout Section
1400 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1402 name "sec:Navigating"
1407 \begin_inset Index idx
1410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1419 \begin_layout Standard
1420 LyX offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1423 \begin_layout Itemize
1428 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1429 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1432 \begin_layout Itemize
1433 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1435 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1438 or by the toolbar button
1441 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1447 \begin_layout Itemize
1448 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1450 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1453 and use the same menu to return to them.
1454 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1457 \begin_layout Standard
1461 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1466 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1467 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1469 \begin_inset space ~
1474 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1475 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1476 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1477 your last editing position.
1480 \begin_layout Standard
1485 key the cursor will be vertically centered in LyX's main window.
1488 \begin_layout Subsection
1490 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1492 name "sub:The-Outliner"
1499 \begin_layout Standard
1500 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1501 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1502 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1504 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1510 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1514 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1515 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1521 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1526 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1530 \begin_layout Standard
1531 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1532 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1533 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1534 dialog and to modify the citation.
1537 \begin_layout Standard
1538 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1540 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1541 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1549 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1552 \begin_layout Standard
1553 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1554 you further to control the display.
1559 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1560 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1566 option keeps it in the current view state.
1567 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1568 \begin_inset space ~
1571 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1572 \begin_inset space ~
1575 3, the subsections of sections
1576 \begin_inset space ~
1579 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1584 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1585 \begin_inset space ~
1589 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1599 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1602 \begin_layout Standard
1604 \begin_inset space \space{}
1608 \begin_inset Graphics
1609 filename ../images/reload.png
1614 \begin_inset space ~
1617 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1618 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1621 \begin_inset space \space{}
1625 \begin_inset Graphics
1626 filename ../images/down.png
1628 groupId toolbarbuttons
1633 \begin_inset space ~
1637 \begin_inset space \space{}
1641 \begin_inset Graphics
1642 filename ../images/up.png
1644 groupId toolbarbuttons
1649 \begin_inset space ~
1652 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1653 So, for example, you can move section
1654 \begin_inset space ~
1658 \begin_inset space ~
1661 2.4 or after section
1662 \begin_inset space ~
1666 LyX will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1668 \begin_inset Graphics
1669 filename ../images/promote.png
1671 groupId toolbarbuttons
1676 \begin_inset Graphics
1677 filename ../images/demote.png
1679 groupId toolbarbuttons
1683 (or the corresponding key bindings
1691 ) you can change the level of sections.
1692 So you can for example make section
1693 \begin_inset space ~
1697 \begin_inset space ~
1701 \begin_inset space ~
1707 \begin_layout Section
1708 Input/Word Completion
1709 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1711 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1716 \begin_inset Index idx
1719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1726 \begin_inset Index idx
1729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1760 \begin_layout Standard
1761 LyX provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
1763 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
1764 is used to propose completions.
1767 \begin_layout Standard
1768 Input completion can be activated in the LyX preferences (menu
1770 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1775 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1782 \begin_inset space ~
1786 \begin_inset space ~
1791 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
1795 \begin_inset space ~
1800 the completions are always shown in a popup.
1801 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
1805 \begin_inset space ~
1811 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
1812 popup completion and choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
1815 \begin_layout Standard
1816 LyX displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there
1817 are completions available.
1822 key to accept a proposed completion.
1823 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
1824 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
1825 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
1832 \begin_layout Standard
1833 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
1834 ing options for text.
1835 The special math option
1839 enables characters to be composed.
1840 If, for example, you want to insert the character
1841 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
1844 , you can then input the characters
1845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1856 to a formula to get it.
1857 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
1858 of the math toolbar.
1859 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
1863 that is in LyX's installation folder.
1864 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
1873 \begin_layout Section
1875 \begin_inset Index idx
1878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1885 \begin_inset Index idx
1888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1917 \begin_inset Index idx
1920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1951 \begin_layout Standard
1952 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
1965 , which can be changed in the LyX preferences under
1967 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1971 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
1972 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1978 reference "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
1985 \begin_layout Standard
1989 \begin_inset space ~
1997 \begin_inset space ~
2018 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2022 \begin_layout Labeling
2023 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2027 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2028 LatexCommand nomenclature
2030 description "Tabulator key"
2036 There is no such thing as a tab stop in LyX.
2037 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2038 \begin_inset space ~
2042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2044 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2049 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2051 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2055 , especially section
2056 \begin_inset space ~
2060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2062 reference "sub:Lists"
2068 If you are still confused, look in the
2073 \begin_inset Newline newline
2080 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2081 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2085 \begin_layout Labeling
2086 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2090 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2091 LatexCommand nomenclature
2093 description "Escape key"
2100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2107 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2108 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2111 \begin_layout Labeling
2112 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2118 \begin_inset space ~
2122 \begin_inset space ~
2129 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2130 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2134 \begin_layout Standard
2135 There are three modifier keys:
2138 \begin_layout Labeling
2139 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2157 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2158 LatexCommand nomenclature
2160 description "Control key"
2164 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2165 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2169 \begin_layout Itemize
2178 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2181 \begin_layout Itemize
2190 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2193 \begin_layout Itemize
2202 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2206 \begin_layout Labeling
2207 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2225 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2226 LatexCommand nomenclature
2228 description "Shift key"
2232 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2233 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2236 \begin_layout Labeling
2237 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2255 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2256 LatexCommand nomenclature
2258 description "Alt or Meta key"
2262 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2263 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2264 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2270 \begin_inset Newline newline
2273 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2275 menu accelerator keys
2278 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2279 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2283 \begin_layout Standard
2284 For example, the sequence
2285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2291 \begin_inset space ~
2295 \begin_inset space ~
2301 \begin_inset space ~
2309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2328 \begin_inset space ~
2334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2344 \begin_layout Standard
2349 manual lists all other things bound to the
2357 \begin_layout Standard
2358 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2359 LyX, because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar
2360 at the bottom of LyX's main window which describes the name of the action
2361 you have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2362 The LyX menus also list the defined key bindings.
2363 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2364 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2366 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2382 followed by a capital
2389 \begin_layout Chapter
2391 \begin_inset Index idx
2394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2403 \begin_layout Section
2405 \begin_inset Index idx
2408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2417 \begin_layout Subsection
2421 \begin_layout Standard
2422 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2423 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2424 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2425 numbering schemes, and so on.
2426 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2427 and format the title of your document differently.
2430 \begin_layout Standard
2435 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2436 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2437 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2438 If you don't choose a document class, LyX picks one for you by default.
2439 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2442 \begin_layout Subsection
2444 \begin_inset Index idx
2447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2454 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2456 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2463 \begin_layout Standard
2464 You can select a class using the
2466 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2467 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2471 \begin_inset Index idx
2474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2481 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2485 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2489 \begin_layout Standard
2490 There are four standard document classes in LyX.
2494 \begin_layout Description
2495 Article for basic articles
2498 \begin_layout Description
2499 Report for basic reports
2502 \begin_layout Description
2503 Book for writing a book
2506 \begin_layout Description
2507 Letter for US-style letters
2510 \begin_layout Standard
2511 There are also some non-standard classes, which LyX only uses if you have
2512 installed the corresponding LaTeX class files, though most LaTeX distributions
2513 will include many of these.
2514 Here are some of the classes.
2515 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2517 Special Document Classes
2526 \begin_layout Description
2527 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2530 \begin_layout Description
2531 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2535 \begin_layout Description
2536 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2540 \begin_layout Description
2541 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2542 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2543 There are three article layouts available.
2544 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2545 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2546 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2547 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2552 sequential numbering
2553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2556 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2557 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2558 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2559 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2562 \begin_layout Description
2563 Beamer Layout for presentations
2566 \begin_layout Description
2567 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2568 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2572 \begin_layout Description
2573 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2576 \begin_layout Description
2578 \begin_inset space ~
2581 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2584 \begin_layout Description
2585 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2588 \begin_layout Description
2589 Foils Used to make transparencies
2592 \begin_layout Description
2593 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2594 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2598 \begin_layout Description
2599 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2600 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2603 \begin_layout Description
2604 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2607 \begin_layout Description
2608 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2611 \begin_layout Description
2612 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2613 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2614 (Is used by this document.)
2617 \begin_layout Description
2618 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2621 \begin_layout Description
2622 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2625 \begin_layout Description
2630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2637 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2638 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2640 This class is not completely compatible with all LyX features.
2643 \begin_layout Description
2644 Slides Used to make transparencies
2647 \begin_layout Description
2649 \begin_inset space ~
2652 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2653 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2656 \begin_layout Description
2657 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2660 \begin_layout Standard
2661 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2663 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2669 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2670 of the document classes.
2673 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2677 \begin_layout Standard
2678 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2680 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2681 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2683 \begin_inset Index idx
2686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2703 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2704 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2706 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2709 \begin_layout Standard
2711 LyX includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
2712 and some of them, like
2716 , are highly specialized.
2717 LyX tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
2718 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing
2720 No LaTeX distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2721 by some document class.
2722 There are just too many of them.
2723 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2726 \begin_layout Standard
2727 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2735 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
2736 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2737 document class for a new file.
2738 LyX will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
2740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2743 Installing new LaTeX files
2744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2751 manual for information on how to install them.
2752 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
2758 \begin_layout Standard
2759 Although LyX provides support for many different sorts of documents, it
2760 does not include support for every document class people might want to
2762 For example, many universities provide LaTeX class files to be used for
2763 dissertations submitted to those universities.
2764 The LyX team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
2766 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
2769 \begin_inset space ~
2776 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
2779 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2781 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2788 \begin_inset Index idx
2791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2800 \begin_layout Standard
2801 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
2802 chosen document class.
2803 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
2804 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
2811 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2815 \begin_inset Index idx
2818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2825 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
2829 \begin_layout Standard
2830 Some modules require LaTeX packages or file format converters that are not
2831 always installed by default.
2832 LyX will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
2833 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
2834 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
2835 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since LyX will not be
2836 able to compile the LaTeX file without the missing prerequisites.
2837 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
2838 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure LyX by selecting
2841 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2845 \begin_inset Index idx
2848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2849 Reconfiguration of LyX
2855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2858 Installing new LaTeX files
2859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2866 manual for more information on installing required packages.
2869 \begin_layout Standard
2870 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
2873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2878 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
2879 LyX will advise you about these things.
2887 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2889 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2891 name "sub:Local-Layout"
2896 \begin_inset Index idx
2899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2900 Document ! Local Layout
2908 \begin_layout Standard
2909 Modules are to LyX much as packages are to LaTeX: They are intended to be
2910 used in a variety of different documents.
2911 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
2912 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
2913 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
2914 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
2915 You want something that is like a document's own LaTeX preamble.
2916 What you want is LyX's
2917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2933 manual for information on how to use it.
2936 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2940 \begin_layout Standard
2941 Each class has a default set of options.
2942 Here's a quick table describing them:
2945 \begin_layout Standard
2946 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
2952 \begin_layout Standard
2954 \begin_inset Tabular
2955 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
2956 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
2957 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
2958 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
2959 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
2960 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
2961 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
2963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3415 \begin_layout Standard
3416 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3422 \begin_layout Standard
3423 You're probably also wondering what
3424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3428 \begin_inset space ~
3432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3436 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3437 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3442 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3447 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3457 headings, there are also
3465 headings, and so on.
3466 We will describe these headings fully in section
3467 \begin_inset space ~
3471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3473 reference "sub:Headings"
3480 \begin_layout Subsection
3482 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3484 name "sub:Document-Layout"
3489 \begin_inset Index idx
3492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3501 \begin_inset Index idx
3504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3513 \begin_layout Standard
3514 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3516 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3523 \begin_inset space ~
3531 \begin_inset space ~
3536 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3538 This is only necessary if LyX doesn't support special options you want
3539 to use for your document.
3540 To learn more about your favorite LaTeX-class and its options, you have
3544 \begin_layout Standard
3548 \begin_inset space ~
3555 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3561 \begin_inset space ~
3566 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3567 You can choose between the following five options:
3570 \begin_layout Labeling
3571 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3576 Use default page style of current class.
3579 \begin_layout Labeling
3580 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3585 No page numbers or headings.
3588 \begin_layout Labeling
3589 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3597 \begin_layout Labeling
3598 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3603 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3604 Whether LyX uses the current chapter or the current section depends on
3605 the maximum sectioning level of the class.
3608 \begin_layout Labeling
3609 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3614 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3615 have the LaTeX-package
3620 \begin_inset Index idx
3623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3624 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
3630 How they are defined is explained in section
3631 \begin_inset space ~
3635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3637 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3644 \begin_layout Standard
3645 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3646 \begin_inset space ~
3650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3652 reference "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3659 \begin_layout Subsection
3660 Paper Size and Orientation
3661 \begin_inset Index idx
3664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3665 Document ! Paper size
3671 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3673 name "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3680 \begin_layout Standard
3681 You can find the following options in the menu
3684 \begin_inset space ~
3691 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3697 \begin_inset Index idx
3700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3709 \begin_layout Labeling
3710 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3714 \begin_inset space ~
3719 What size paper to print on.
3724 \begin_layout Itemize
3730 \begin_layout Itemize
3736 \begin_layout Itemize
3742 \begin_layout Itemize
3748 \begin_layout Itemize
3751 US letter, US legal, US executive
3754 \begin_layout Itemize
3760 \begin_layout Itemize
3767 \begin_layout Labeling
3768 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3773 To choose whether to output as
3784 \begin_layout Labeling
3785 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3789 \begin_inset space ~
3794 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
3795 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
3798 \begin_layout Subsection
3800 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3807 \begin_inset Index idx
3810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3817 \begin_inset Index idx
3820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3829 \begin_layout Standard
3830 Paper margins are set in the menu
3832 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3836 \begin_inset Index idx
3839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3848 \begin_layout Standard
3849 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
3850 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
3851 the paper format and the font size into account.
3854 \begin_layout Subsection
3858 \begin_layout Standard
3859 If you change a document class, LyX has to convert
3864 That includes the paragraph environments.
3865 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
3866 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
3867 If this is the case, and you change the document class, LyX will mark the
3868 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
3869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3877 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
3879 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
3880 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
3881 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
3884 \begin_layout Section
3885 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
3886 \begin_inset Index idx
3889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3890 Paragraph ! Indentation
3898 \begin_layout Subsection
3900 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3902 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3909 \begin_layout Standard
3910 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
3911 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
3914 \begin_layout Standard
3915 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
3916 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
3917 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
3918 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
3922 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
3928 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
3929 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
3930 language than English.
3931 LaTeX takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language
3935 \begin_layout Standard
3936 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
3937 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
3939 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
3940 LyX takes care of that.
3941 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
3943 That way, LyX can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure
3944 figures fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom
3945 of a page, and so on.
3949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3950 LaTeX does this when LyX goes to produce a printable file.
3955 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
3956 LyX gives you the ability globally to change
3960 these pre-coded spacings.
3961 We will explain more later.
3964 \begin_layout Subsection
3965 Paragraph Separation
3966 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3968 name "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3973 \begin_inset Index idx
3976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3977 Paragraph ! Separation
3985 \begin_layout Standard
3993 \begin_inset space ~
4001 \begin_inset space ~
4008 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4012 \begin_inset Index idx
4015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4021 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4024 \begin_layout Subsection
4028 \begin_layout Standard
4029 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4032 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4034 \begin_inset space ~
4039 dialog and toggle the
4042 \begin_inset space ~
4047 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4050 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4054 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4055 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4059 \begin_layout Standard
4060 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4061 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4064 \begin_layout Subsection
4066 \begin_inset Index idx
4069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4070 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4078 \begin_layout Standard
4081 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4085 \begin_inset Index idx
4088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4097 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4101 \begin_inset space ~
4110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4111 You need to have the LaTeX-package
4116 \begin_inset Index idx
4119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4120 LaTeX-packages ! setspace
4125 installed to use this feature.
4130 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4132 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4134 \begin_inset space ~
4139 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4140 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4143 \begin_layout Section
4144 Paragraph Environments
4145 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4147 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4152 \begin_inset Index idx
4155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4156 Paragraph ! Environments
4162 \begin_inset Index idx
4165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4166 Paragraph environments|(
4174 \begin_layout Subsection
4178 \begin_layout Standard
4179 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4182 \begin_layout Standard
4201 \begin_inset Newline newline
4204 command sequence in LaTeX files.
4205 If you don't know LaTeX, or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4206 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4215 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4218 \begin_layout Standard
4219 A paragraph environment is simply a
4220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4227 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4228 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4229 scheme, labels, and so on.
4230 Additionally, you can
4231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4238 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4239 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4240 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4241 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4243 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4245 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4248 \begin_layout Standard
4249 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4250 \begin_inset Graphics
4251 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4257 at the left end of the toolbar.
4258 LyX will change the environment of the
4262 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4263 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4264 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4268 \begin_layout Standard
4277 create a new paragraph using the
4281 paragraph environment.
4283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4290 because if you are in one of these environments:
4293 \begin_layout Itemize
4299 \begin_layout Itemize
4305 \begin_layout Itemize
4311 \begin_layout Itemize
4317 \begin_layout Itemize
4323 \begin_layout Itemize
4329 \begin_layout Itemize
4335 \begin_layout Standard
4336 LyX keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4340 , rather than resetting it to
4345 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4346 \begin_inset space ~
4350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4352 reference "sec:Nesting"
4359 \begin_layout Subsection
4363 \begin_layout Standard
4364 The default paragraph environment is
4369 It creates a plain paragraph.
4370 If LyX resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4371 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4372 this manual) are in the
4379 \begin_layout Standard
4380 You can nest a paragraph using the
4384 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4392 \begin_layout Subsection
4394 \begin_inset Index idx
4397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4406 \begin_layout Standard
4407 A LaTeX title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the
4409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4416 for thanks or contact information.
4417 For certain types of documents, LaTeX places all of this on a separate
4418 page along with today's date.
4419 For other types of documents, the title
4420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4427 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4431 \begin_layout Standard
4432 LyX provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4446 Here's how you use them:
4449 \begin_layout Itemize
4450 Put the title of your document in the
4457 \begin_layout Itemize
4458 Put the author name in the
4465 \begin_layout Itemize
4466 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4467 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4473 Note that using this environment is optional.
4474 If you don't provide any, LaTeX will automatically insert today's date.
4475 If you don't want a date, use the option
4477 Suppress default date on front page
4481 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4482 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4484 \begin_inset space ~
4492 \begin_layout Standard
4493 You can use footnotes to insert
4494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4501 or contact information.
4504 \begin_layout Subsection
4506 \begin_inset Index idx
4509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4516 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4525 \begin_layout Standard
4526 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4527 LyX takes care of the numbering for you.
4530 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4532 \begin_inset Index idx
4535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4536 Section headings ! Numbered
4544 \begin_layout Standard
4545 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4549 \begin_layout Enumerate
4555 \begin_layout Enumerate
4561 \begin_layout Enumerate
4567 \begin_layout Enumerate
4573 \begin_layout Enumerate
4579 \begin_layout Enumerate
4585 \begin_layout Enumerate
4591 \begin_layout Standard
4592 LyX labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4593 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4594 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4597 \begin_layout Standard
4598 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4599 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4600 You group the book into chapters.
4601 LyX does a similar grouping:
4604 \begin_layout Itemize
4609 is divided into either
4620 \begin_layout Itemize
4632 \begin_layout Itemize
4644 \begin_layout Itemize
4656 \begin_layout Itemize
4668 \begin_layout Itemize
4680 \begin_layout Standard
4681 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4689 Not all document types use the
4693 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4698 is the top-level heading.
4706 \begin_layout Standard
4711 environment to label a new sub-subsection, LyX labels it with its number,
4712 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
4714 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4726 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4728 \begin_inset Index idx
4731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4732 Section headings ! Unnumbered
4740 \begin_layout Standard
4741 The unnumbered section headings have a
4742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4749 at the end of their name.
4750 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
4751 the table of contents, see section
4752 \begin_inset space ~
4756 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4765 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4766 Changing the Numbering
4767 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4769 name "sub:Numbering-depth"
4776 \begin_layout Standard
4777 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
4778 in the Table of Contents.
4779 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
4781 Just as certain classes start with
4795 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
4805 This is something you can change.
4808 \begin_layout Standard
4811 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4815 \begin_inset Index idx
4818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4827 \begin_inset space ~
4831 \begin_inset space ~
4836 you will see two counters.
4841 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy LyX numbers a section
4843 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
4847 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4848 Short Titles of Headings
4849 \begin_inset Index idx
4852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4853 Section headings ! Short titles
4859 \begin_inset Argument 1
4862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4869 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4871 name "sec:Short-Titles"
4878 \begin_layout Standard
4879 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
4880 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
4881 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
4882 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
4885 \begin_layout Standard
4886 LaTeX allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
4887 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
4888 avoiding the problem mentioned.
4889 To specify a short title, use the menu
4891 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4893 \begin_inset space ~
4899 This will insert a box labeled
4900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4908 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4915 ) which you can use to enter the short title text.
4916 This also works for captions inside floats.
4919 \begin_layout Standard
4920 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
4923 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4927 \begin_layout Standard
4928 The following information applies to all section headings:
4931 \begin_layout Itemize
4932 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
4935 \begin_layout Itemize
4936 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
4939 \begin_layout Itemize
4940 You can only use inline math in these environments.
4943 \begin_layout Itemize
4944 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
4947 \begin_layout Subsection
4948 Quotes and Poetry line spacing
4951 \begin_layout Standard
4952 LyX has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
4966 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
4967 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
4968 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
4969 the text they contain.
4970 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
4978 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
4981 \begin_layout Standard
4982 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
4991 when you start a new paragraph.
4992 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
4996 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
4997 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
4998 have to change back to the
5002 environment yourself.
5005 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5015 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5022 \begin_inset Index idx
5025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5034 \begin_layout Standard
5035 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5036 time for the differences.
5045 are identical except for one difference:
5049 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5058 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5061 \begin_layout Standard
5062 Here's an example of the
5075 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5077 See – no indentation!
5081 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5082 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5083 the other paragraph.
5086 \begin_layout Standard
5087 Here's another example, this time in the
5094 \begin_layout Quotation
5100 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5101 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5102 the first line, then
5106 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5110 you were quoting other text.
5113 \begin_layout Quotation
5114 Here's a new paragraph.
5115 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5116 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5119 \begin_layout Standard
5120 As the examples show,
5124 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5125 They should put quotes in the
5130 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5134 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5137 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5143 \begin_inset Index idx
5146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5155 \begin_inset Index idx
5158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5165 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5174 \begin_layout Standard
5179 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5185 \begin_inset Newline newline
5188 Which I did not rehearse!
5192 It could be much worse.
5193 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5195 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5196 indented a bit more than the first.
5197 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5203 \begin_inset Newline newline
5206 And make things look fine
5207 \begin_inset Newline newline
5213 arg "newline-insert newline"
5219 \begin_layout Standard
5224 does not indent both margins.
5225 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5226 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the
5233 arg "newline-insert newline"
5239 \begin_layout Subsection
5241 \begin_inset Index idx
5244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5251 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5260 \begin_layout Standard
5261 LyX has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5271 environments, LyX labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5280 environments, LyX lets you provide your own label.
5281 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5282 describing some general features of all four of them.
5285 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5289 \begin_layout Standard
5290 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5292 First, LyX treats each paragraph as a list item.
5301 reset the environment to
5305 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5306 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5307 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5311 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
5315 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5322 \begin_layout Standard
5323 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5324 In fact, LyX changes the labels on some list items depending on how it
5326 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5327 you read all of section
5328 \begin_inset space ~
5332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5334 reference "sec:Nesting"
5341 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5347 \begin_inset Index idx
5350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5357 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5366 \begin_layout Standard
5367 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5371 paragraph environment.
5372 It has the following properties:
5375 \begin_layout Itemize
5376 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5380 \begin_layout Itemize
5381 LyX uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5384 \begin_layout Itemize
5385 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5389 \begin_layout Itemize
5390 The items can have any length.
5391 LyX automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5392 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5399 \begin_layout Itemize
5404 environment inside another
5408 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5412 \begin_layout Itemize
5413 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5416 \begin_layout Itemize
5417 LyX always shows the same symbol on screen.
5420 \begin_layout Itemize
5422 \begin_inset space ~
5426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5428 reference "sec:Nesting"
5432 for a full explanation of nesting.
5436 \begin_layout Standard
5437 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5446 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5449 \begin_layout Standard
5450 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5451 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5454 \begin_layout Itemize
5455 The label for the first level
5459 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5463 \begin_layout Itemize
5464 The label for the second level is a dash.
5468 \begin_layout Itemize
5469 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5473 \begin_layout Itemize
5474 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5478 \begin_layout Itemize
5479 Back out to the third level.
5483 \begin_layout Itemize
5484 Back to the second level.
5488 \begin_layout Itemize
5489 Back to the outermost level.
5492 \begin_layout Standard
5493 These are the default labels for an
5498 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5500 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5503 dialog in the submenu
5508 \begin_inset Index idx
5511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5517 These customizations are not displayed in LyX.
5520 \begin_layout Standard
5521 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5522 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5524 \begin_inset space ~
5528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5530 reference "sec:Nesting"
5537 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5543 \begin_inset Index idx
5546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5553 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5555 name "sec:Enumerate"
5562 \begin_layout Standard
5567 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5568 It has these properties:
5571 \begin_layout Enumerate
5572 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5576 \begin_layout Enumerate
5577 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5581 \begin_layout Enumerate
5582 LyX automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5585 \begin_layout Enumerate
5590 environment resets the counter to one.
5593 \begin_layout Enumerate
5606 \begin_layout Enumerate
5607 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5608 Items can have any length.
5611 \begin_layout Enumerate
5612 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5615 \begin_layout Enumerate
5616 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5619 \begin_layout Enumerate
5620 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5624 \begin_layout Standard
5633 shows the different labels for each item in LyX.
5634 Here is how LyX labels the four different levels in an
5641 \begin_layout Enumerate
5642 The first level of an
5646 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5650 \begin_layout Enumerate
5651 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5655 \begin_layout Enumerate
5656 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5660 \begin_layout Enumerate
5661 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5664 \begin_layout Enumerate
5665 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5670 \begin_layout Enumerate
5671 Back to the third level
5675 \begin_layout Enumerate
5676 Back to the second level.
5680 \begin_layout Enumerate
5681 Back to the outermost level.
5684 \begin_layout Standard
5685 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5689 environment, see section
5690 \begin_inset space ~
5694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5696 reference "sub:Customized-Lists"
5701 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in LyX.
5704 \begin_layout Standard
5705 There is more to nesting
5709 environments than we've stated here.
5710 You should read section
5711 \begin_inset space ~
5715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5717 reference "sec:Nesting"
5721 to learn more about nesting.
5724 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5730 \begin_inset Index idx
5733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5742 \begin_layout Standard
5743 Unlike the previous two environments, the
5747 list has no fixed label.
5748 Instead, LyX uses the first
5749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5756 of the first line as the label.
5760 \begin_layout Description
5761 Example: This is an example of the
5768 \begin_layout Standard
5769 LyX typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
5773 \begin_layout Standard
5775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5782 it is meant that the first usage of the
5786 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
5788 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
5796 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
5801 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5802 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5804 \begin_inset space ~
5810 \begin_inset space ~
5814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5816 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
5820 for more information.) Here is an example:
5823 \begin_layout Description
5825 \begin_inset space ~
5828 Example: This one shows how to use a
5831 \begin_inset space ~
5843 \begin_layout Description
5844 Usage: You should use the
5848 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
5849 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
5851 It's not a good idea to use a
5855 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
5856 You're better off using
5868 paragraphs into them.
5871 \begin_layout Description
5872 Nesting: You can nest
5876 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
5880 \begin_layout Standard
5881 Notice that after the first line, LyX indents subsequent lines, offsetting
5882 them from the first line.
5885 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5887 \begin_inset Index idx
5890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5899 \begin_layout Standard
5904 environment is a LyX extension to LaTeX.
5907 \begin_layout Standard
5916 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
5918 Here are its properties:
5921 \begin_layout Labeling
5922 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5924 \begin_inset space ~
5927 labels LyX uses the first
5928 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5935 of each line as the item label.
5940 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
5941 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
5942 space as described above.
5945 \begin_layout Labeling
5946 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5947 margins As you can see, LyX uses different margins for the item label and
5948 the body of the item text.
5949 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
5950 label width plus a little extra space.
5954 \begin_layout Labeling
5955 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5957 \begin_inset space ~
5960 width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is
5962 If the label width is larger, the label
5963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5970 into the first line.
5971 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
5972 margin of the rest of the item text.
5975 \begin_layout Labeling
5976 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5978 \begin_inset space ~
5981 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
5986 environment has the same left margin.
5987 \begin_inset Newline newline
5990 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
5993 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5995 \begin_inset space ~
6000 dialog (toolbar button
6003 arg "layout-paragraph"
6010 \begin_inset space ~
6015 determines the default label width.
6016 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6025 multiple times instead.
6026 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in LaTeX.
6028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6035 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6038 \begin_inset space ~
6043 every time you alter a label in a
6048 \begin_inset Newline newline
6051 The predefined default width is the length of
6052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6060 \begin_inset space ~
6066 \begin_layout Standard
6071 list the same way as the
6075 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6081 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6085 \begin_layout Standard
6090 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6091 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6093 \begin_inset space ~
6097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6099 reference "sec:Nesting"
6103 to learn about nesting.
6106 \begin_layout Standard
6107 There is yet another feature of the
6111 list: As you can see in the examples, LyX left-justifies the item labels
6113 You can use additional
6117 to change how LyX justifies the item label.
6122 are documented in section
6123 \begin_inset space ~
6127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6129 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
6134 Here are some examples:
6137 \begin_layout Labeling
6138 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6139 Left The default for
6146 \begin_layout Labeling
6147 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6148 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6155 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6158 \begin_layout Labeling
6159 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6160 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6164 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6171 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6174 \begin_layout Subsection
6176 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6178 name "sub:Customized-Lists"
6183 \begin_inset Index idx
6186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6195 \begin_layout Standard
6196 The features described in this section require that the module
6198 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6200 is loaded in the document settings.
6201 The module uses the LaTeX-package
6206 \begin_inset Index idx
6209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6210 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6218 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6219 Custom Enumerate Lists
6220 \begin_inset Index idx
6223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6224 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6232 \begin_layout Standard
6234 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6237 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6240 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6241 There you add the command
6244 \begin_layout Standard
6252 \begin_layout Standard
6253 in TeX Code (shortcut
6263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6264 For more about TeX Code, look at section
6265 \begin_inset space ~
6269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6271 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6284 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6291 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6292 For capital Roman numerals replace
6304 in the command above.
6305 For Arabic numerals use
6313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6320 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6335 \begin_layout Standard
6337 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6345 You can only number 26
6346 \begin_inset space ~
6349 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6357 \begin_layout Standard
6358 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6359 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6362 \begin_layout Standard
6363 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6366 \begin_layout Enumerate
6367 \begin_inset Argument 1
6370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6396 \begin_layout Enumerate
6397 \begin_inset Argument 1
6400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6423 \begin_layout Enumerate
6428 \begin_layout Enumerate
6429 \begin_inset Argument 1
6432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6456 \begin_layout Enumerate
6457 \begin_inset Argument 1
6460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6486 \begin_layout Standard
6487 For this list these commands were used:
6490 \begin_layout Standard
6501 \begin_inset Newline newline
6509 \begin_inset Newline newline
6517 \begin_inset Newline newline
6527 \begin_layout Standard
6534 makes the label emphasized and
6543 \begin_layout Standard
6544 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6552 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6553 lists until you change the definition.
6561 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6563 \begin_inset Index idx
6566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6567 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6575 \begin_layout Standard
6576 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6579 \begin_layout Enumerate
6580 \begin_inset Argument 1
6583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6602 \begin_inset Note Note
6605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6606 goes back to default numbering
6614 \begin_layout Enumerate
6618 \begin_layout Standard
6622 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6626 \begin_layout Standard
6627 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6632 Its numbering appears in blue within LyX to indicate that it is a resumed
6633 list and that the numbering will not be correct in LyX, but in the output.
6636 \begin_layout Standard
6637 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6645 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a LaTeX error.
6653 \begin_layout Standard
6654 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6656 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6657 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6658 of a normal enumeration.
6659 There, insert the command
6662 \begin_layout Standard
6668 \begin_layout Standard
6673 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6677 \begin_layout Enumerate
6681 \begin_layout Enumerate
6685 \begin_layout Standard
6686 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6689 \begin_layout Enumerate
6690 \begin_inset Argument 1
6693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6709 This enumeration starts at 4
6712 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6714 \begin_inset Index idx
6717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6726 \begin_layout Standard
6727 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
6729 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
6732 \begin_layout Itemize
6736 \begin_layout Itemize
6737 with standard spacing
6740 \begin_layout Standard
6741 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
6743 Add there the command
6747 to get no additional list space like in this example:
6750 \begin_layout Itemize
6751 \begin_inset Argument 1
6754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6773 \begin_layout Itemize
6777 \begin_layout Itemize
6781 \begin_layout Standard
6782 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the LaTeX-package
6788 \begin_inset Index idx
6791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6792 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6798 For more information see its documentation,
6799 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
6808 \begin_layout Standard
6809 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
6811 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
6812 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
6813 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
6816 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
6819 \begin_layout Enumerate
6820 \begin_inset Argument 1
6823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6831 parindent, labelsep=2cm
6844 \begin_layout Enumerate
6845 with negative indentation
6848 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6849 Further Customization
6850 \begin_inset Index idx
6853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6854 Lists ! Customization
6862 \begin_layout Standard
6863 You can also change the style of description lists.
6867 \begin_layout Standard
6873 \begin_layout Standard
6874 changes the description label font, the command
6877 \begin_layout Standard
6883 \begin_layout Standard
6884 sets the list style.
6887 \begin_layout Standard
6888 An example where the command
6891 \begin_layout Standard
6896 itshape, style=nextline
6899 \begin_layout Standard
6903 \begin_layout Description
6905 \begin_inset space ~
6909 \begin_inset Argument 1
6912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6918 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
6920 itshape, style=nextline
6930 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
6931 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
6935 \begin_layout Description
6937 \begin_inset space ~
6940 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
6941 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
6942 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
6945 \begin_layout Standard
6946 There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeX-package
6952 \begin_inset Index idx
6955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6956 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6962 For more information see its documentation
6963 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
6972 \begin_layout Subsection
6974 \begin_inset Index idx
6977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6986 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6994 \begin_inset space ~
7002 \begin_layout Standard
7003 Although LyX has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7011 \begin_inset space ~
7017 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7018 in a specific order, otherwise LaTeX gags on the document.
7019 In contrast, you can use the
7026 \begin_inset space ~
7031 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7032 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7036 \begin_layout Standard
7037 Of course, you're not limited to using
7044 \begin_inset space ~
7053 \begin_inset space ~
7058 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7059 some European academic papers.
7062 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7066 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7073 \begin_layout Standard
7078 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7079 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7083 \begin_inset space ~
7088 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7089 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7090 Here's an example of each:
7093 \begin_layout Right Address
7095 \begin_inset Newline newline
7099 \begin_inset Newline newline
7103 \begin_inset Newline newline
7106 When is it? What is today?
7109 \begin_layout Standard
7113 \begin_inset space ~
7119 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which LyX sets to
7120 fit the largest block of text on a single line.
7121 Here's an example of the
7128 \begin_layout Address
7130 \begin_inset Newline newline
7133 Where do I send this
7134 \begin_inset Newline newline
7137 Your post office and country
7140 \begin_layout Standard
7141 As you can see, both
7148 \begin_inset space ~
7153 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7158 in either of these environments, LyX resets the nesting depth and sets
7164 This makes sense, since
7172 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7173 Thus, you have to use
7180 arg "newline-insert newline"
7185 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7186 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7188 \begin_inset space ~
7192 \begin_inset space ~
7197 ) to start a new line in an
7204 \begin_inset space ~
7212 \begin_layout Subsection
7216 \begin_layout Standard
7217 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7218 or list of references.
7219 LyX contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7222 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7226 \begin_inset Index idx
7229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7238 \begin_layout Standard
7243 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7244 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7245 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7246 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7260 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7261 The book document classes ignores the
7265 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7269 in a letter document class.
7272 \begin_layout Standard
7277 environment does several things for you.
7278 First, it puts the centered label
7279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7287 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7289 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7290 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7291 the subsequent text.
7292 Well, that's how it will appear on the LyX screen.
7293 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7297 \begin_layout Standard
7298 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7302 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7303 The new paragraph will still be in the
7308 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7309 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7312 \begin_layout Standard
7313 \begin_inset Float figure
7318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7320 \begin_inset Graphics
7321 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7329 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7332 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7334 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7355 \begin_layout Standard
7356 We would love to demonstrate the
7360 environment, but since this document is in the
7361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7368 class, we can't do this.
7369 We inserted it therefore as figure
7370 \begin_inset space ~
7374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7376 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7381 If you have never heard of an
7382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7389 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7392 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7398 \begin_inset Index idx
7401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7408 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7410 name "sub:Biblio_environment"
7417 \begin_layout Standard
7422 environment is used to list references.
7423 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7424 only use it at the end of the document.
7436 \begin_layout Standard
7437 When you first open a
7441 environment, LyX adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7457 depending on the document class.
7458 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7459 Each paragraph of the
7463 environment is a bibliography entry.
7468 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7469 Each new paragraph is still in the
7476 \begin_layout Standard
7477 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7478 by using a BibTeX database.
7479 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of LyX's bibliogra
7480 phy handling, have a look at section
7481 \begin_inset space ~
7485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7487 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7494 \begin_layout Subsection
7498 \begin_inset Index idx
7501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7502 Paragraph ! LyX code
7508 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7517 \begin_layout Standard
7522 environment is another LyX extension.
7523 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7528 key as a fixed whitespace;
7532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7544 \begin_inset space ~
7549 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7554 this is the only case in which you can type multiple whitespaces in LyX.
7555 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7558 arg "newline-insert newline"
7575 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7576 So, when you finish using the
7580 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7581 Also, you can nest the
7585 environment inside of others.
7588 \begin_layout Standard
7589 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7592 \begin_layout Itemize
7596 arg "newline-insert newline"
7599 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7600 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7604 \begin_inset space \space{}
7614 arg "newline-insert newline"
7620 \begin_layout Itemize
7624 arg "newline-insert newline"
7635 \begin_layout Itemize
7640 to begin a new paragraph, then you can use a
7647 \begin_layout Itemize
7651 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
7658 \begin_layout Itemize
7659 You can't have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7660 You must put at least one
7664 in any line you want blank.
7665 Otherwise, LaTeX generates errors.
7668 \begin_layout Itemize
7669 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7673 since that will insert
7678 You get the typewriter double quotes with
7681 arg "self-insert \""
7687 \begin_layout Standard
7691 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7695 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7699 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7703 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7707 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7708 printf("Hello World!
7713 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7717 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7721 \begin_layout Standard
7722 This is just the standard
7723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7734 \begin_layout Standard
7739 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts,
7740 rc-files, and so on.
7741 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
7742 as if you used a typewriter.
7743 \begin_inset Index idx
7746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7747 Paragraph environments|)
7752 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
7755 Program Code Listings
7760 \begin_inset space ~
7768 \begin_layout Section
7769 Nesting Environments
7770 \begin_inset Index idx
7773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7774 Nesting ! Environments
7780 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7789 \begin_layout Subsection
7793 \begin_layout Standard
7794 LyX treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific
7796 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
7798 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
7800 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
7802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7812 \begin_layout Enumerate
7816 \begin_layout Enumerate
7821 \begin_layout Enumerate
7825 \begin_layout Enumerate
7830 \begin_layout Enumerate
7834 \begin_layout Standard
7835 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
7836 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
7838 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7840 \begin_inset space ~
7844 \begin_inset space ~
7852 \begin_inset space ~
7856 \begin_inset space ~
7861 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
7863 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
7866 arg "depth-increment"
7872 arg "depth-decrement"
7886 arg "depth-increment"
7892 arg "depth-decrement"
7896 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
7897 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
7901 \begin_layout Standard
7902 Note that LyX only changes the nesting depth if it can.
7903 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
7904 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
7905 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
7908 \begin_layout Standard
7909 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
7910 In LyX, you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're
7912 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
7915 \begin_layout Subsection
7916 What You Can and Can't Nest
7919 \begin_layout Standard
7920 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
7921 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
7924 \begin_layout Standard
7925 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
7926 than a simple yes or no.
7927 There are three types of paragraph environments:
7930 \begin_layout Itemize
7931 Completely unnestable
7934 \begin_layout Itemize
7935 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
7939 \begin_layout Itemize
7940 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
7944 \begin_layout Standard
7945 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
7946 environments have them:
7949 \begin_layout Description
7950 Unnestable Can't nest them.
7951 Can't nest into them.
7955 \begin_layout Itemize
7961 \begin_layout Itemize
7967 \begin_layout Itemize
7973 \begin_layout Itemize
7979 \begin_layout Itemize
7986 \begin_layout Description
7988 \begin_inset space ~
7991 Nestable You can nest them.
7992 You can nest other things into them.
7996 \begin_layout Itemize
8002 \begin_layout Itemize
8008 \begin_layout Itemize
8014 \begin_layout Itemize
8020 \begin_layout Itemize
8026 \begin_layout Itemize
8032 \begin_layout Itemize
8038 \begin_layout Itemize
8045 \begin_layout Description
8046 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8047 You can't nest anything into them.
8051 \begin_layout Itemize
8057 \begin_layout Itemize
8063 \begin_layout Itemize
8069 \begin_layout Itemize
8075 \begin_layout Itemize
8081 \begin_layout Itemize
8087 \begin_layout Itemize
8093 \begin_layout Itemize
8099 \begin_layout Itemize
8105 \begin_layout Itemize
8111 \begin_layout Itemize
8117 \begin_layout Itemize
8123 \begin_layout Itemize
8129 \begin_layout Itemize
8133 \begin_inset space ~
8139 \begin_layout Itemize
8146 \begin_layout Standard
8147 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8155 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8165 \begin_inset space ~
8168 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8169 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8170 nested section headings violate this.
8178 \begin_layout Subsection
8179 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8180 \begin_inset Index idx
8183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8184 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8192 \begin_layout Standard
8193 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8194 affected by nesting anyhow.
8198 \begin_layout Itemize
8202 \begin_layout Itemize
8206 \begin_layout Itemize
8210 \begin_layout Standard
8212 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8220 Figures and tables in
8224 are not affected by this.
8229 Have a look at section
8230 \begin_inset space ~
8234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8236 reference "sec:Floats"
8240 for more information about
8247 \begin_layout Standard
8248 LyX can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8249 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8253 \begin_layout Standard
8254 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8262 of its own, it behaves just like a
8263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8270 paragraph environment.
8271 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8275 \begin_layout Standard
8276 Here's an example with a table:
8279 \begin_layout Enumerate
8284 \begin_layout Enumerate
8285 This is (a) and it's nested.
8289 \begin_layout Standard
8290 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8296 \begin_layout Standard
8298 \begin_inset Tabular
8299 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8300 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8301 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8302 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8386 \begin_layout Standard
8387 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8394 \begin_layout Enumerate
8396 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8400 \begin_layout Enumerate
8404 \begin_layout Standard
8405 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8408 \begin_layout Enumerate
8413 \begin_layout Enumerate
8414 This is (a) and it's nested.
8418 \begin_layout Standard
8419 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8425 \begin_layout Standard
8427 \begin_inset Tabular
8428 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8429 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8430 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8431 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8515 \begin_layout Standard
8516 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8522 \begin_layout Enumerate
8529 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8532 \begin_layout Enumerate
8536 \begin_layout Standard
8537 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8541 \begin_layout Standard
8542 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8544 LyX then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8547 \begin_layout Enumerate
8552 \begin_layout Enumerate
8553 This is (a) and it's nested.
8556 \begin_layout Standard
8557 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8563 \begin_layout Standard
8565 \begin_inset Tabular
8566 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8567 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8568 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8569 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8654 \begin_layout Standard
8655 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8661 \begin_layout Enumerate
8663 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
8670 \begin_layout Enumerate
8674 \begin_layout Standard
8675 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
8681 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
8682 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
8686 \begin_layout Subsection
8687 Usage and General Features
8690 \begin_layout Standard
8691 Speaking of levels, LyX can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
8693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8700 is the innermost possible depth.
8701 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
8704 \begin_layout Enumerate
8705 level #1 – outermost
8709 \begin_layout Enumerate
8714 \begin_layout Enumerate
8719 \begin_layout Enumerate
8724 \begin_layout Itemize
8729 \begin_layout Itemize
8738 \begin_layout Standard
8739 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
8740 both of them in the example.
8741 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
8751 For example, if we tried to nest another
8756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8763 , we would get errors.
8766 \begin_layout Subsection
8768 \begin_inset Index idx
8771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8780 \begin_layout Standard
8781 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
8782 We have several examples of nested environments.
8783 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
8787 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8788 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
8791 \begin_layout Labeling
8792 \labelwidthstring MMM
8793 #1-a This is the outermost level.
8802 \begin_layout Labeling
8803 \labelwidthstring MMM
8804 #2-a This is level #2.
8805 We created it by using
8808 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8814 arg "depth-increment"
8821 \begin_layout Labeling
8822 \labelwidthstring MMM
8823 #3-a This is level #3.
8824 This time, we just enter
8831 arg "depth-increment"
8835 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
8839 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8845 arg "depth-increment"
8852 \begin_layout Standard
8857 environment, nested inside of
8858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8866 So, it's at level #4.
8867 We did this by entering
8870 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8876 arg "depth-increment"
8879 , then changing the paragraph environment to
8884 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
8900 \begin_layout Standard
8905 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
8908 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8914 \begin_layout Labeling
8915 \labelwidthstring MMM
8916 #4-a This is level #4.
8920 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8923 and changed the paragraph environment back to
8928 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
8932 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
8937 keep nesting things inside
8938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8949 \begin_layout Labeling
8950 \labelwidthstring MMM
8951 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar \ldots{}
8956 \begin_layout Labeling
8957 \labelwidthstring MMM
8958 #6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{}
8959 and this is level #6.
8960 By now, you should know how we made these two.
8964 \begin_layout Labeling
8965 \labelwidthstring MMM
8966 #5-b Back to level #5.
8970 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8976 arg "depth-decrement"
8983 \begin_layout Labeling
8984 \labelwidthstring MMM
8988 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
8994 arg "depth-decrement"
8997 , we're back at level #4.
9001 \begin_layout Labeling
9002 \labelwidthstring MMM
9003 #3-b Back to level #3.
9004 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9008 \begin_layout Labeling
9009 \labelwidthstring MMM
9010 #2-b Back to level #2.
9015 \begin_layout Labeling
9016 \labelwidthstring MMM
9017 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9018 After this sentence, we will enter
9022 and change the paragraph environment back to
9029 \begin_layout Standard
9030 We could have also used the
9046 environment in place of the
9051 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9054 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9055 Example 2: Inheritance
9058 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9059 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9062 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9071 arg "depth-increment"
9075 \begin_inset Newline newline
9078 which, we will change to the
9086 \begin_layout Enumerate
9091 environment, at level #2.
9094 \begin_layout Enumerate
9095 Notice how the nested
9099 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9103 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9107 \begin_layout Standard
9108 We ended this example by entering
9113 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9117 and reset the nesting depth by using
9120 arg "depth-decrement"
9126 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9127 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9136 \begin_inset Argument 1
9139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9140 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9148 \begin_layout Enumerate
9149 This is level #1, in an
9153 paragraph environment.
9154 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9158 \begin_layout Enumerate
9163 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9169 arg "depth-increment"
9173 Now, what happens if we nest an
9177 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9178 label be? An asterisk?
9182 \begin_layout Itemize
9192 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9193 So, its label is a bullet.
9194 (We got here by using
9197 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9203 arg "depth-increment"
9206 , then changing the environment to
9214 \begin_layout Itemize
9215 Here's level #4, produced using
9218 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9224 arg "depth-increment"
9228 We will do that again\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9233 \begin_layout Enumerate
9234 \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9236 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9241 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9245 , because we are in the
9253 environment (that is, it is an
9268 \begin_layout Enumerate
9273 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9274 type of numbering does LyX use?
9277 \begin_layout Enumerate
9278 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9281 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9284 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9287 \begin_layout Enumerate
9291 arg "depth-decrement"
9294 to decrease the depth after the next
9297 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9304 \begin_layout Enumerate
9306 Look what type of label LyX is using!
9310 \begin_layout Enumerate
9312 Even though we've changed levels, LyX is still using a lowercase Roman
9313 numeral as the label.Why?
9316 \begin_layout Enumerate
9317 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9326 Notice, however, that LyX
9330 reset the counter for the label.
9334 \begin_layout Enumerate
9338 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9344 arg "depth-decrement"
9347 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9348 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9349 into the twofold-nested
9357 \begin_layout Enumerate
9358 The same thing happens if we do another
9361 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9367 arg "depth-decrement"
9370 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9373 \begin_layout Standard
9374 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9379 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9393 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label LyX uses for
9399 The same rule applies for the
9403 environment, as well.
9406 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9407 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9410 \begin_layout Enumerate
9411 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9412 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9413 the same detail with how we did it.
9422 \begin_layout Standard
9430 arg "depth-increment"
9437 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9438 the example in parentheses someplace.
9439 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9440 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9441 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9445 \begin_layout Enumerate
9450 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9455 Now we will add verse.
9456 \begin_inset Newline newline
9459 It will get much worse.
9460 \begin_inset Newline newline
9470 arg "depth-increment"
9481 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9482 \begin_inset Newline newline
9485 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9486 \begin_inset Newline newline
9492 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9505 \begin_layout Standard
9506 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9512 \begin_layout Standard
9514 \begin_inset Tabular
9515 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9516 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
9517 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9518 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
9561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9607 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9617 arg "depth-increment"
9623 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9633 arg "depth-decrement"
9640 \begin_layout Enumerate
9645 : level #1) This is another item.
9646 Note that selecting a
9650 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
9651 3 times to put the table inside the
9659 \begin_layout Quotation
9660 We're now ending the
9664 list and changing to
9669 We're still at level #1.
9670 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
9671 The next set of paragraphs is a
9672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9679 We will nest both the
9686 \begin_inset space ~
9691 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
9695 for the letter body.
9699 arg "break-paragraph inverse"
9702 to preserve the depth.
9703 Remember that you need to use
9706 arg "newline-insert newline"
9709 to create multiple lines inside the
9716 \begin_inset space ~
9726 \begin_layout Right Address
9728 \begin_inset Newline newline
9731 Moosegroin, MT 00100
9732 \begin_inset Newline newline
9738 \begin_layout Address
9740 \begin_inset space ~
9746 \begin_layout Quotation
9747 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
9748 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9751 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
9752 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
9753 a backlog in our orders for methane.
9754 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
9755 as soon as possible.
9756 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
9759 \begin_layout Quotation
9760 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
9761 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
9762 with your order, along with payment.
9765 \begin_layout Quotation
9766 We thank you again for your patience.
9769 \begin_layout Address
9771 \begin_inset Newline newline
9778 \begin_layout Quotation
9779 That ends that example!
9782 \begin_layout Standard
9783 As you can see, nesting environments in LyX gives you a lot of power with
9784 just a few keystrokes.
9785 We could have easily nested an
9806 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
9809 \begin_layout Section
9810 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
9811 \begin_inset Index idx
9814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9823 \begin_layout Standard
9824 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
9825 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, LyX offers
9826 you more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
9827 be broken at the end of a line.
9828 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
9832 \begin_layout Subsection
9834 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9836 name "sub:Protected-Space"
9841 \begin_inset Index idx
9844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9853 \begin_layout Standard
9854 The protected space: It is used to tell LyX (and LaTeX) not to break the
9856 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
9860 Further documentation is given in section
9861 \begin_inset Newline newline
9865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9867 reference "sec:Bibliography"
9875 \begin_layout Standard
9876 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
9877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9891 reference "sec:Bibliography"
9896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9900 A protected space is set with
9902 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
9903 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
9905 \begin_inset space ~
9913 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
9919 \begin_layout Subsection
9921 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9923 name "sub:Horizontal-Space"
9928 \begin_inset Index idx
9931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9932 Spacing ! Horizontal
9940 \begin_layout Standard
9941 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
9943 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
9944 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
9948 The length units are listed in Appendix
9949 \begin_inset space ~
9953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9955 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
9962 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9966 name "sub:Inter-word-Space"
9971 \begin_inset Index idx
9974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9983 \begin_layout Standard
9984 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
9985 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
9986 at the ends of sentences.
9987 There is no need to do this as LyX automatically takes care about this.
9988 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
9989 followed by a period; see section
9990 \begin_inset space ~
9994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9996 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
10001 To insert a normal space, select
10003 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10004 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10006 \begin_inset space ~
10014 arg "space-insert normal"
10020 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10022 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10024 name "sub:Thin-Space"
10029 \begin_inset Index idx
10032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10041 \begin_layout Standard
10043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10050 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10059 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10060 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10061 inside abbreviations:
10064 \begin_layout Quote
10066 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10070 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10073 \begin_layout Standard
10074 or between values and units.
10075 Compare for example this:
10076 \begin_inset Newline newline
10080 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10084 \begin_inset Newline newline
10087 10 kg (normal space
10090 \begin_layout Standard
10091 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10093 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10094 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10096 \begin_inset space ~
10104 arg "space-insert thin"
10110 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10114 \begin_layout Standard
10115 You can also insert the following space types:
10118 \begin_layout Description
10120 \begin_inset space ~
10124 \begin_inset space ~
10127 space A line with a
10128 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10132 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10136 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10139 negative thin space between the arrows.
10142 \begin_layout Description
10144 \begin_inset space ~
10148 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10152 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10156 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10160 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10164 \begin_inset space ~
10168 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10171 em) space between the arrows.
10174 \begin_layout Description
10176 \begin_inset space ~
10180 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10184 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10188 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10192 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10196 \begin_inset space ~
10200 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10203 em) space between the arrows.
10206 \begin_layout Description
10208 \begin_inset space ~
10212 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10216 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10220 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10224 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10228 \begin_inset space ~
10232 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10235 em) space between the arrows.
10238 \begin_layout Description
10240 \begin_inset space ~
10244 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10248 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10253 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10260 cm space between the arrows.
10263 \begin_layout Standard
10265 \begin_inset space ~
10269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10271 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10275 lists the different space sizes.
10278 \begin_layout Standard
10279 \begin_inset Float table
10284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10286 \begin_inset Caption
10288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10289 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10291 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10295 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10305 \begin_inset Tabular
10306 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="8" columns="2">
10307 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
10308 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
10309 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
10311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10349 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10373 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10397 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10421 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10436 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10449 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10464 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10477 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10492 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10505 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10526 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10532 \begin_inset Index idx
10535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10544 \begin_layout Standard
10545 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special LyX feature for adding extra space
10546 in a uniform fashion.
10547 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
10548 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
10549 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
10550 equally between themselves.
10553 \begin_layout Standard
10554 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
10557 \begin_layout Quote
10559 This is on the left side
10560 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10563 This is on the right
10566 \begin_layout Quote
10569 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10573 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10579 \begin_layout Quote
10582 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10586 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10590 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10596 \begin_layout Standard
10597 That was an example in the
10603 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10607 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
10611 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10614 is one in a standard paragraph.
10615 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
10619 sitting in-between the two arrows.
10622 \begin_layout Standard
10623 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
10626 \begin_inset space ~
10631 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
10634 \begin_layout Standard
10636 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
10640 \begin_inset space ~
10646 \begin_layout Standard
10648 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
10652 \begin_inset space ~
10658 \begin_layout Standard
10660 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
10664 \begin_inset space ~
10670 \begin_layout Standard
10672 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
10676 \begin_inset space ~
10682 \begin_layout Standard
10684 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
10688 \begin_inset space ~
10694 \begin_layout Standard
10696 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
10700 \begin_inset space ~
10706 \begin_layout Standard
10707 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10715 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
10719 in the first line in a paragraph, LyX ignores it.
10720 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
10721 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
10725 option in the space dialog.
10733 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10735 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10737 name "sub:Phantom-Space"
10742 \begin_inset Index idx
10745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10754 \begin_layout Standard
10755 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
10756 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
10759 \begin_layout Standard
10760 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
10763 What is correct English?:
10764 \begin_inset Newline newline
10768 \begin_inset Newline newline
10772 \begin_inset space ~
10775 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
10776 \begin_inset Newline newline
10780 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
10783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10791 \begin_inset Newline newline
10795 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
10798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10806 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
10812 \begin_layout Standard
10814 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
10815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10819 \begin_inset space ~
10823 \begin_inset space ~
10827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10831 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
10833 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10834 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10838 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
10840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10844 \begin_inset space ~
10848 \begin_inset space ~
10852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10855 into the phantom inset (note the space after
10856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10864 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
10865 That is why it is named
10866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10874 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
10875 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
10879 \begin_layout Subsection
10881 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10883 name "sub:Vertical-Space"
10888 \begin_inset Index idx
10891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10900 \begin_layout Standard
10901 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
10903 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10904 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10906 \begin_inset space ~
10912 There you find the following sizes:
10915 \begin_layout Standard
10928 are LaTeX sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
10933 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
10935 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10936 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10938 \begin_inset space ~
10944 \begin_inset Index idx
10947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10948 Document ! Settings
10953 for the paragraph separation.
10954 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
10965 \begin_layout Standard
10971 \begin_inset Index idx
10974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10980 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
10981 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
10986 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
10987 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
10996 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11005 s are described in section
11006 \begin_inset space ~
11010 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11012 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
11021 If there are several
11025 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11026 You can therefore use
11030 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11033 \begin_layout Standard
11038 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11039 \begin_inset space ~
11043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11045 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11052 \begin_layout Standard
11053 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11063 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11064 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11076 \begin_layout Subsection
11077 Paragraph Alignment
11078 \begin_inset Index idx
11081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11082 Paragraph ! Alignment
11090 \begin_layout Standard
11091 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11093 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11096 dialog (toolbar button
11099 arg "layout-paragraph"
11103 There are five possibilities:
11106 \begin_layout Itemize
11114 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11120 \begin_layout Itemize
11128 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11134 \begin_layout Itemize
11142 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11148 \begin_layout Itemize
11156 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11162 \begin_layout Itemize
11170 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11176 \begin_layout Standard
11177 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11178 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11179 the left and right margins.
11180 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11183 \begin_layout Standard
11185 This paragraph is right aligned,
11188 \begin_layout Standard
11190 this one is centered,
11193 \begin_layout Standard
11195 this one is left aligned.
11198 \begin_layout Subsection
11200 \begin_inset Index idx
11203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11204 Page breaks ! Forced
11210 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11212 name "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11219 \begin_layout Standard
11220 If you don't like the way LaTeX does the page breaks in your document, you
11221 can force a page break where you want one.
11222 Normally this will not be necessary, because LaTeX is good at page breaking.
11223 Only if you use a lot of
11227 , LaTeX's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11230 \begin_layout Standard
11231 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11232 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11236 have to change the page breaking.
11239 \begin_layout Standard
11240 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11242 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11244 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11245 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11247 \begin_inset space ~
11253 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11255 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11256 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11258 \begin_inset space ~
11263 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11265 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11266 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11269 \begin_layout Standard
11270 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11271 at the top of a page.
11272 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11273 LyX gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11274 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11275 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11277 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11279 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11283 to learn more about
11290 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11292 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11294 name "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11299 \begin_inset Index idx
11302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11303 Page breaks ! Clear
11311 \begin_layout Standard
11312 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
11313 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11314 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11315 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
11316 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11319 \begin_layout Standard
11320 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11322 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11323 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11325 \begin_inset space ~
11331 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
11333 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11334 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11336 \begin_inset space ~
11340 \begin_inset space ~
11345 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
11346 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
11349 \begin_layout Subsection
11351 \begin_inset Index idx
11354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11363 name "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
11370 \begin_layout Standard
11371 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
11373 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
11375 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11376 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11378 \begin_inset space ~
11382 \begin_inset space ~
11390 arg "newline-insert newline"
11394 Another type that is inserted via the menu
11396 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11397 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11399 \begin_inset space ~
11403 \begin_inset space ~
11411 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
11414 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
11416 This is useful to avoid
11417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11424 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
11427 \begin_layout Standard
11428 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct LaTeX's line breaking, as
11429 LaTeX is very good at line breaking.
11430 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
11431 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
11432 \begin_inset space ~
11436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11438 reference "sec:Quote"
11443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11445 reference "sec:Verse"
11450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11452 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
11459 \begin_layout Subsection
11461 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11463 name "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
11468 \begin_inset Index idx
11471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11480 \begin_layout Standard
11482 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11493 \begin_layout Standard
11497 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11498 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11500 \begin_inset space ~
11505 you can insert horizontal lines.
11506 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
11507 of the current text line or the paragraph.
11508 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
11511 \begin_layout Standard
11513 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11524 \begin_layout Section
11525 Characters and Symbols
11528 \begin_layout Standard
11529 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
11530 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
11531 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
11533 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11539 reference "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
11543 for information on how this is done.
11546 \begin_layout Standard
11547 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
11552 dialog via the menu
11554 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11555 Special Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11561 \begin_layout Standard
11562 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11570 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
11571 when you are using a special screen font in LyX's preferences.
11572 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
11580 \begin_layout Section
11581 Fonts and Text Styles
11582 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11584 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
11591 \begin_layout Subsection
11593 \begin_inset Index idx
11596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11605 \begin_layout Standard
11606 There are two types of fonts:
11609 \begin_layout Description
11611 \begin_inset space ~
11615 \begin_inset Index idx
11618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11624 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
11625 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11629 characters) in the font.
11630 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
11631 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
11632 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
11633 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
11634 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
11635 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
11636 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
11637 \begin_inset Newline newline
11640 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
11641 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
11642 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
11643 sizes than at small ones.
11644 \begin_inset Newline newline
11658 \begin_inset space ~
11666 \begin_layout Description
11668 \begin_inset space ~
11672 \begin_inset Index idx
11675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11681 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
11682 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
11683 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
11684 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
11685 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
11686 image manipulation program.
11687 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
11688 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
11689 \begin_inset space ~
11692 pixels high up to 34
11693 \begin_inset space ~
11696 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
11697 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
11698 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
11700 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
11701 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
11702 \begin_inset Newline newline
11705 Bitmap fonts are named
11708 \begin_inset space ~
11713 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
11716 \begin_layout Standard
11717 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
11718 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
11719 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
11720 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
11721 use scalable fonts.
11724 \begin_layout Standard
11725 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
11728 \begin_layout Standard
11729 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
11730 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
11731 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
11732 font to emphasize text, you use an
11733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11741 This concept fits in perfectly with LyX.
11742 In LyX, you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
11746 \begin_layout Subsection
11748 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11750 name "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
11757 \begin_layout Standard
11758 Traditionally, LaTeX used its own fonts.
11759 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
11760 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your LaTeX
11762 The reason is that LaTeX needs some extra information about the fonts,
11763 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
11764 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
11765 to a word processor.
11766 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
11767 are generally of very good quality, and that LaTeX files are very portable
11768 across different machines.
11769 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional LaTeX has increased a
11770 lot in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
11772 In LyX, only a subset of these are directly selectable via the user interface
11774 \begin_inset space ~
11778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11780 reference "sub:Document-Font"
11785 However, all the others are available if you enter the relevant LaTeX code
11786 in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired
11790 \begin_layout Standard
11791 Recent developments brought some new LaTeX engines that are also able directly
11792 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely XeTeX
11794 Both engines are supported by LyX.
11795 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
11796 that is installed on your system.
11797 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
11800 \begin_layout Standard
11801 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11809 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
11810 es; so you might have to experiment.
11818 \begin_layout Standard
11819 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11827 XeTeX and especially LuaTeX, are still rather new and thus not as mature
11828 as traditional LaTeX or PDFTeX.
11836 \begin_layout Subsection
11837 Document Font and Font size
11838 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11840 name "sub:Document-Font"
11845 \begin_inset Index idx
11848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11855 \begin_inset Index idx
11858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11867 \begin_layout Standard
11868 You can set the document fonts in the
11870 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11874 \begin_inset Index idx
11877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11878 Document ! Settings
11888 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
11889 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
11892 \begin_inset space ~
11901 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
11902 for (some) sans serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit
11903 with the roman font.
11906 \begin_layout Standard
11913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11922 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
11923 This requires that you use
11929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11968 as the output format, i.
11969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11973 \begin_inset space \space{}
11976 you will have to have either XeTeX or LuaTeX installed (see section
11977 \begin_inset space ~
11981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11983 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
11988 You will then not have access to TeX's own fonts.
11989 Note that LyX then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists
11991 \begin_inset space ~
11994 serif, and typewriter), since LyX cannot determine the family.
11995 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
11996 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar \slash{}
11998 LyX cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12001 \begin_layout Standard
12002 If you use TeX fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the
12007 and a list of fonts available with your LaTeX distribution.
12012 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12013 In most cases, this will be the standard TeX font, known as
12014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12020 \begin_inset space ~
12026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12039 European Computer Modern
12042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12049 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12052 \begin_layout Standard
12061 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12062 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12067 This problem doesn't appear if you read PDFs in
12070 \begin_inset space ~
12075 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12081 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12082 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12085 \begin_layout Itemize
12089 \begin_inset space ~
12094 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12107 \begin_inset space ~
12112 was developed for the LaTeX community in order to replace
12116 as the default font.
12117 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12118 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12121 \begin_inset space ~
12134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12135 One difference is improved kerning.
12143 \begin_layout Itemize
12147 \begin_inset space ~
12151 \begin_inset space ~
12156 fonts in (the rare) case that
12159 \begin_inset space ~
12164 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12179 Virtual means that it
12180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12191 -glyphs from other fonts.
12192 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12214 Loading the LaTeX-package
12219 \begin_inset Index idx
12222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12223 LaTeX-packages ! aeguill
12228 with the document preamble line
12229 \begin_inset Newline newline
12236 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12237 \begin_inset Newline newline
12242 will fix the guillemet problem.
12247 and that accented characters are not
12251 glyph, but built of
12255 characters, the accent and the letter.
12256 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12262 If you search for example for the French word
12263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12270 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12279 and not for the glyph
12280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12284 \begin_inset space ~
12288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12294 \begin_layout Itemize
12295 If you do not like the look of
12303 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12304 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12308 \begin_inset space ~
12314 \begin_inset space ~
12324 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12325 \begin_inset space ~
12328 serif and typewriter fonts,
12332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12333 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12334 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12340 \begin_inset space ~
12349 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
12350 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12354 \begin_inset space \space{}
12362 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12366 \begin_inset space \space{}
12372 \begin_inset space ~
12380 \begin_inset space ~
12390 but you can also select your own.
12391 \begin_inset Newline newline
12394 The differences between roman,
12397 \begin_inset space ~
12406 fonts are explained in section
12407 \begin_inset space ~
12411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12413 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12418 \begin_inset Newline newline
12424 \begin_inset space ~
12429 was originally designed for newspapers.
12430 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
12431 into the small newspaper columns.
12435 \begin_inset space ~
12440 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
12443 \begin_layout Standard
12444 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
12457 Some classes provide additional sizes.
12462 depends on the class you are using.
12463 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
12466 \begin_layout Standard
12467 Note that the font size is the
12472 That means that LyX scales all other possible font sizes (such as those
12473 used in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
12474 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
12477 \begin_inset space ~
12483 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
12484 \begin_inset space ~
12488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12490 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12497 \begin_layout Standard
12501 \begin_inset space ~
12506 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
12508 \begin_inset space ~
12511 serif or typewriter.
12516 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
12526 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
12529 \begin_layout Standard
12538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12547 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
12553 \begin_inset Index idx
12556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12557 LaTeX-packages ! fontenc
12563 \begin_inset space ~
12567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12569 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
12574 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
12575 Unless you have specific reasons, use
12582 \begin_layout Standard
12583 With some fonts, the checkboxes
12585 Use Old Style Figures
12589 Use True Small Caps
12592 These are extra features some fonts provide.
12595 Use Old Style Figures
12597 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
12599 Old style figures are the numerals (0
12600 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12604 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12607 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
12611 Use True Small Caps
12613 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
12614 of scaled capitals.
12615 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
12616 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
12619 \begin_layout Standard
12624 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
12625 a font to display the script characters.
12629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12630 The font will be the argument for the commands of the LaTeX-package
12635 \begin_inset Index idx
12638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12639 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
12644 So this has no effect for the document language
12658 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
12662 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12670 When you choose a new font or font size, LyX does
12674 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
12675 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
12676 LyX's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
12678 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12681 dialog, see section
12682 \begin_inset space ~
12686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12688 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
12700 \begin_layout Subsection
12701 Using Different Character Styles
12702 \begin_inset Index idx
12705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12712 \begin_inset Index idx
12715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12724 \begin_layout Standard
12725 As we've already seen, LyX automatically changes the character style for
12726 certain paragraph environments.
12727 LyX supports two character styles,
12736 You can activate both of these styles via keybindings, the menus, and the
12740 \begin_layout Standard
12745 style, do one of the following:
12748 \begin_layout Itemize
12749 click on the toolbar button
12758 \begin_layout Itemize
12759 use the key binding
12768 \begin_layout Standard
12769 These commands are all toggles.
12774 style is already active, they deactivate it.
12777 \begin_layout Standard
12778 One typically uses the
12782 style for proper names.
12784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12791 is the original author of LyX.
12792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12798 \begin_layout Standard
12799 A more widely used character style is the
12804 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
12811 \begin_layout Itemize
12812 clicking on the toolbar button
12821 \begin_layout Itemize
12822 using the keybindings
12831 \begin_layout Standard
12836 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or LaTeX-packag
12837 es use a different font.
12840 \begin_layout Standard
12841 We've been using the
12845 style all over the place in this document.
12846 Here's one more example:
12849 \begin_layout Quotation
12852 Do not overuse character styles!
12855 \begin_layout Standard
12856 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
12857 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
12858 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
12859 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
12863 \begin_layout Standard
12864 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
12872 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12874 \begin_inset space ~
12877 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12883 arg "dialog-show character"
12889 \begin_layout Subsection
12890 Fine-Tuning with the
12895 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12897 name "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12902 \begin_inset Index idx
12905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12914 \begin_layout Standard
12915 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
12916 LyX gives you a way to create a custom character style.
12917 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
12918 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
12919 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
12920 from ordinary dialog.
12923 \begin_layout Standard
12924 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
12925 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
12926 \begin_inset Newline newline
12929 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
12930 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
12933 \begin_layout Standard
12934 To use custom character styles, open the
12936 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12938 \begin_inset space ~
12941 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12944 dialog or press the toolbar button
12947 arg "dialog-show character"
12951 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
12952 font property that you can choose.
12953 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
12956 \begin_inset space ~
12961 , which keeps the current state of that property.
12966 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
12967 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
12968 environments all at once.
12971 \begin_layout Standard
12972 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
12975 \begin_inset space ~
12987 \begin_layout Labeling
12988 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
12994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13002 The possible options are:
13006 \begin_layout Labeling
13007 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13012 This is the Roman font family.
13013 Normally a serif font.
13014 It's also the default family.
13024 \begin_layout Labeling
13025 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13029 \begin_inset space ~
13036 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13048 \begin_layout Labeling
13049 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13056 This is the Typewriter font family.
13062 arg "font-typewriter"
13071 \begin_layout Labeling
13072 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13077 This corresponds to the print weight.
13082 \begin_layout Labeling
13083 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13088 This is the Medium font series.
13089 It's also the default series.
13092 \begin_layout Labeling
13093 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13100 This is the Bold font series.
13113 \begin_layout Labeling
13114 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13119 As the name implies.
13124 \begin_layout Labeling
13125 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13130 This is the Upright font shape.
13131 It's also the default shape.
13134 \begin_layout Labeling
13135 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13149 s the Italic font shape
13155 \begin_layout Labeling
13156 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13163 This is the Slanted font shape
13165 (although it might not be visible in LyX, this is different from italic).
13168 \begin_layout Labeling
13169 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13173 \begin_inset space ~
13180 This is the Small caps font shape
13187 \begin_layout Labeling
13188 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13193 Alters the text color.
13194 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
13198 \begin_inset space ~
13203 , which means that the document default color set in
13205 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13206 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13212 \begin_inset space ~
13217 is used, you can choose between
13250 \begin_inset Index idx
13253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13262 \begin_layout Labeling
13263 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13268 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
13269 the language of the document.
13270 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
13272 \begin_inset Newline newline
13275 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
13276 LaTeX respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
13277 When using the spell checking (see section
13278 \begin_inset space ~
13282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13284 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
13288 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
13291 \begin_layout Labeling
13292 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13297 Alters the size of the font.
13298 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
13299 proportional to the document font size.
13300 Once again, you don't feed LyX the details, but a general description of
13301 what you want to do.
13306 \begin_layout Labeling
13307 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13328 arg "font-size tiny"
13334 \begin_layout Labeling
13335 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13356 arg "font-size scriptsize"
13362 \begin_layout Labeling
13363 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13384 arg "font-size footnotesize"
13390 \begin_layout Labeling
13391 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13412 arg "font-size small"
13418 \begin_layout Labeling
13419 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13433 It's also the default size.
13437 arg "font-size normal"
13443 \begin_layout Labeling
13444 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13465 arg "font-size large"
13471 \begin_layout Labeling
13472 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13493 arg "font-size larger"
13499 \begin_layout Labeling
13500 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13521 arg "font-size largest"
13527 \begin_layout Labeling
13528 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13549 arg "font-size huge"
13555 \begin_layout Labeling
13556 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13577 arg "font-size giant"
13583 \begin_layout Labeling
13584 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13589 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
13590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13609 arg "font-size increase"
13615 \begin_layout Labeling
13616 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13621 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
13622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13641 arg "font-size decrease"
13648 \begin_layout Standard
13653 : don't go crazy with this feature.
13654 You should almost never need to change the font size.
13655 LyX automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
13656 — use those instead.
13657 This is here for fine-tuning only!
13660 \begin_layout Labeling
13661 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13666 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
13671 \begin_layout Labeling
13672 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13679 This is text with emphasize on
13682 This might seem like the same as
13686 , but it is actually a bit different.
13692 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
13694 Normally this font is equal to italic.
13697 \begin_layout Labeling
13698 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13705 This is text with Underbar on.
13711 arg "font-underline"
13717 \begin_inset Newline newline
13722 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
13723 when you could not change fonts.
13724 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
13725 This is only possible in LyX because some people
13729 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
13732 \begin_layout Labeling
13733 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13737 \begin_inset space ~
13744 This is text with Double underbar on.
13750 arg "font-underunderline"
13754 \begin_inset Newline newline
13757 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
13758 about double underbar.
13761 \begin_layout Labeling
13762 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13766 \begin_inset space ~
13773 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
13779 arg "font-underwave"
13783 \begin_inset Newline newline
13786 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
13787 Keep antinausea pills handy.
13790 \begin_layout Labeling
13791 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13798 This is text with Strikeout on.
13804 arg "font-strikeout"
13808 \begin_inset Newline newline
13811 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
13812 changed in the meantime.
13815 \begin_layout Labeling
13816 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13823 This is text with Noun on.
13830 , this is a logical attribute.
13831 Normally it's equivalent to
13834 \begin_inset space ~
13843 \begin_layout Standard
13844 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
13845 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
13847 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13849 \begin_inset space ~
13852 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13858 arg "dialog-show character"
13861 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
13862 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
13865 arg "textstyle-apply"
13869 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
13873 \begin_layout Standard
13874 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
13881 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
13882 (suppose you just set the shape to
13883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13901 \begin_inset space ~
13913 \begin_layout Standard
13914 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
13922 \begin_inset space ~
13934 \begin_layout Itemize
13940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13947 font, which means every character has the same width; the
13948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13965 \begin_inset Newline newline
13969 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
13972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13983 \begin_inset Note Note
13986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13987 For more on phantoms see section
13988 \begin_inset space ~
13992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13994 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
14004 \begin_inset Newline newline
14010 \begin_layout Itemize
14015 fonts use characters with serifs.
14016 These are the small
14017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14024 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14025 The following example shows the difference:
14026 \begin_inset Newline newline
14030 \begin_inset Newline newline
14035 text without serifs
14038 \begin_inset Newline newline
14041 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14042 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14049 \begin_layout Itemize
14054 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14055 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14056 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14059 \begin_layout Standard
14060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14067 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14068 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14071 \begin_inset space ~
14076 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14077 the property to be removed.
14078 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14079 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14080 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14098 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14099 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14107 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14111 \begin_inset space ~
14116 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14127 If you, for example, set
14128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14146 \begin_inset space ~
14151 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14160 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
14163 \begin_layout Standard
14164 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
14165 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14168 \begin_layout Section
14169 Printing and Previewing
14172 \begin_layout Subsection
14176 \begin_layout Standard
14177 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14178 using LyX, you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14179 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14180 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14181 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14183 Additional Features
14188 \begin_layout Standard
14189 LyX uses the program LaTeX as its backend.
14190 LaTeX is just a macro package for the TeX typesetting system, but to prevent
14191 confusion, we will only refer to LaTeX.
14192 LyX is what you use to do your actual writing.
14193 Then, LyX calls LaTeX to turn your writing into printable output.
14194 This happens in two stages:
14197 \begin_layout Enumerate
14198 First, LyX converts your document to a series of text commands for LaTeX,
14199 generating a file with the extension,
14200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14214 \begin_layout Enumerate
14215 Next, LyX calls LaTeX to use the commands in the
14219 file to produce printable output.
14222 \begin_layout Subsection
14223 Output file formats
14224 \begin_inset Index idx
14227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14234 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14236 name "sub:Output-file-formats"
14243 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14244 Simple text (ASCII)
14245 \begin_inset Index idx
14248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14249 File formats ! ASCII
14257 \begin_layout Standard
14258 This file type has the extension
14259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14271 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
14272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14275 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
14276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14282 \begin_layout Standard
14283 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
14285 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14286 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14288 \begin_inset space ~
14294 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
14295 a BibTeX bibliography (section
14296 \begin_inset space ~
14300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14302 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
14307 If your document includes such material, use
14309 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14310 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14312 \begin_inset space ~
14316 \begin_inset space ~
14320 \begin_inset space ~
14328 \begin_inset space ~
14332 \begin_inset space ~
14338 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
14339 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
14342 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14344 \begin_inset Index idx
14347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14348 File formats ! LaTeX
14356 \begin_layout Standard
14357 This file type has the extension
14358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14369 and contains all commands that are necessary for the LaTeX program to process
14371 If you know LaTeX, you can use it to find out LaTeX-Errors or to process
14372 it manually with console commands.
14373 The LaTeX-file is automatically created in LyX's temporary directory whenever
14374 you view or export your document.
14377 \begin_layout Standard
14378 You can export your document as a LaTeX-file using the menu
14380 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14381 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14396 The different LaTeX export variants are explained in section
14397 \begin_inset space ~
14401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14403 reference "sub:Export"
14410 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14412 \begin_inset Index idx
14415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14424 \begin_layout Standard
14425 This file type has the extension
14426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14446 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
14447 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
14448 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
14452 \begin_layout Standard
14453 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
14454 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
14455 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
14456 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
14457 when you view the DVI.
14458 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
14461 \begin_layout Standard
14462 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
14464 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14465 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14470 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14471 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14473 \begin_inset space ~
14480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14490 The latter option uses the program
14499 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
14500 font access (see section
14501 \begin_inset space ~
14505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14507 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14512 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
14513 standard TeX processor.
14516 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14518 \begin_inset Index idx
14521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14522 File formats ! PostScript
14530 \begin_layout Standard
14531 This file type has the extension
14532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14544 PostScript was developed by the company
14548 as a printer language.
14549 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
14551 PostScript can be seen as a
14552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14555 programming language
14556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14559 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
14563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14564 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the LaTeX-pack
14570 \begin_inset Index idx
14573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14574 LaTeX-packages ! pstricks
14584 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
14587 \begin_layout Standard
14588 PostScript can only contain images in the format
14589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14592 Encapsulated PostScript
14593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14596 (EPS, file extension
14597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14609 As LyX allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has
14610 to convert them in the background to EPS.
14611 If, for example, you have 50
14612 \begin_inset space ~
14615 images in your document, LyX has to do 50
14616 \begin_inset space ~
14619 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
14620 This might slow down your workflow with LyX.
14621 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
14622 EPS to avoid this problem.
14625 \begin_layout Standard
14626 You can export to PostScript using the menu
14628 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14629 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14635 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14637 \begin_inset Index idx
14640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14647 \begin_inset Index idx
14650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14659 \begin_layout Standard
14660 This file type has the extension
14661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14677 Portable Document Format
14678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14685 was derived from PostScript.
14686 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
14688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14695 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
14696 looks exactly the same.
14699 \begin_layout Standard
14700 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
14701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14704 Joint Photographic Experts Group
14705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14708 (JPG, file extension
14709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14736 Portable Network Graphics
14737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14740 (PNG, file extension
14741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14753 You can also use any other image format, because LyX converts them in the
14754 background to one of these formats.
14755 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
14756 will slow down your workflow.
14757 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
14760 \begin_layout Standard
14761 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
14763 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14769 \begin_layout Description
14771 \begin_inset space ~
14774 (pdflatex) This uses the program
14778 which converts your file directly to PDF.
14781 \begin_layout Description
14783 \begin_inset space ~
14790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14797 X) This uses the program
14801 which converts your file directly to PDF.
14806 is a new engine, derived from
14810 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
14811 access (see section
14812 \begin_inset space ~
14816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14818 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14823 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
14824 standard TeX processor.
14827 \begin_layout Description
14829 \begin_inset space ~
14836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14843 X) This uses the program
14847 that converts your file directly to PDF.
14852 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
14853 font access (see section
14854 \begin_inset space ~
14858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14860 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
14865 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
14866 vertically written Japanese.
14869 \begin_layout Description
14871 \begin_inset space ~
14874 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
14878 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
14882 \begin_layout Description
14884 \begin_inset space ~
14887 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
14891 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
14892 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
14896 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
14897 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
14900 \begin_layout Standard
14904 \begin_inset space ~
14913 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
14914 works without problems.
14915 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar \slash{}
14916 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
14920 \begin_inset space ~
14927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14939 \begin_inset space ~
14946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14955 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
14963 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14965 \begin_inset Index idx
14968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14969 FileFormats ! XHTML
14975 \begin_inset Index idx
14978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14987 \begin_layout Standard
14988 This file type has the extension
14989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15001 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15002 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15003 When LyX produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15004 suitable for the purpose.
15005 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15007 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15008 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15011 between different formats, which are described in section
15013 Math Output in XHTML
15018 \begin_inset space ~
15026 \begin_layout Standard
15027 XHTML output remains
15028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15035 , and not all LyX features are supported yet.
15038 LyX and the World Wide Web
15042 Additional Features
15044 manual, for more information.
15047 \begin_layout Standard
15048 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15050 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15051 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15057 \begin_layout Subsection
15059 \begin_inset Index idx
15062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15071 \begin_layout Standard
15072 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15073 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15088 or use the toolbar button
15095 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15096 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15097 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15103 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15107 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15109 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15115 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15120 Further output formats can be selected via
15122 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15123 View (Other Formats)
15125 or the toolbar button
15126 \begin_inset Graphics
15127 filename ../images/view-others.png
15129 groupId toolbarbuttons
15136 \begin_layout Standard
15137 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15138 viewer window using the menu
15140 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15145 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15146 Update (Other Formats)
15151 \begin_layout Standard
15152 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in LyX's temporary
15154 To have a real output, export your document.
15157 \begin_layout Subsection
15158 Printing the File from within LyX
15159 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15161 name "sub:Printing-the-File"
15168 \begin_layout Standard
15169 Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print
15170 it directly from within LyX.
15171 To print a file, select the menu
15173 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15179 arg "dialog-show print"
15182 ) or click on the toolbar button
15185 arg "dialog-show print"
15189 LyX will internally call LaTeX to produce a DVI.
15190 This file is then processed by the program
15194 to a PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program
15199 Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest.
15202 \begin_layout Standard
15203 You can set the following print parameters in the
15206 \begin_inset space ~
15214 \begin_layout Labeling
15215 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15220 This is the name of the printer to print to.
15224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15225 Note that this printer name is for the program
15234 has to be configured for this printer name.
15235 The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section
15236 \begin_inset space ~
15240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15242 reference "sub:Printer"
15251 The printer should understand PostScript.
15254 \begin_layout Labeling
15255 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15260 The name of a file to print to.
15261 The output will be a PostScript file.
15262 It will be written in LyX's working directory unless you specify the full
15266 \begin_layout Standard
15267 You can choose to print only a range of pages, only even-numbered or only
15268 odd-numbered pages or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options
15269 are useful for printing on two sides with a printer without a duplexer:
15270 you re-insert the pages after printing one set to print on the other side.
15271 Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down.
15272 By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack
15273 of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them.
15276 \begin_layout Section
15277 A few Words about Typography
15278 \begin_inset Index idx
15281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15290 \begin_layout Subsection
15291 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
15292 \begin_inset Index idx
15295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15302 \begin_inset Index idx
15305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15314 \begin_layout Standard
15316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15327 character comes in four lengths: the
15339 , and the minus sign:
15340 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15346 \begin_layout Standard
15347 \begin_inset Tabular
15348 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
15349 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
15350 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
15351 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
15352 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
15353 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15382 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15422 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15447 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15449 \begin_inset space ~
15452 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15459 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15484 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15486 \begin_inset space ~
15489 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15510 \begin_inset Formula $-$
15518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
15521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15544 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15550 \begin_layout Standard
15551 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
15552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15563 character multiple times in a row.
15564 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
15565 the final output, but not in LyX.
15567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15571 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15583 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15587 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15597 \begin_layout Standard
15598 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
15599 math mode and has a length of its own.
15600 Here are some examples:
15603 \begin_layout Enumerate
15604 line- and page-breaks
15605 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15615 \begin_layout Enumerate
15617 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15627 \begin_layout Enumerate
15628 Oh — there's a dash.
15629 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15639 \begin_layout Enumerate
15640 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
15644 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
15654 \begin_layout Subsection
15656 \begin_inset Index idx
15659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15666 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15668 name "sub:Hyphenation"
15675 \begin_layout Standard
15676 Words are not hyphenated within LyX but automatically in the output.
15677 Hyphenation is done by the LaTeX-package
15682 \begin_inset Index idx
15685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15686 LaTeX-packages ! babel
15691 following the rules of the document language.
15694 \begin_layout Standard
15695 LaTeX hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
15700 font and with unusual constructs, like
15701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15709 If LaTeX cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points
15711 This is done with the menu
15713 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15714 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15716 \begin_inset space ~
15722 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to LaTeX.
15723 If no hyphenation is necessary, LaTeX will ignore them.
15726 \begin_layout Standard
15727 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
15728 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
15730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15738 LaTeX would then see the hyphen
15739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15746 as a hyphenation possibility.
15747 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
15748 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
15749 as described in section
15750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15753 Prevent Hyphenation
15754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15760 \begin_inset space ~
15768 \begin_layout Subsection
15770 \begin_inset Index idx
15773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15782 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15783 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
15784 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15786 name "sub:Abbreviations"
15793 \begin_layout Standard
15794 When LyX calls LaTeX to generate the final version of your document, LaTeX
15795 automatically distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
15796 LaTeX then adds the
15797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15800 appropriate amount of space.
15801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15804 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
15806 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
15807 gets after another word.
15810 \begin_layout Standard
15811 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
15812 not work in all cases.
15814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15825 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
15826 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
15829 \begin_layout Standard
15830 Here are some examples of
15834 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
15837 \begin_layout Itemize
15842 \begin_layout Itemize
15847 \begin_layout Standard
15848 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
15851 \begin_layout Itemize
15853 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15857 this is too much space!
15860 \begin_layout Itemize
15865 \begin_layout Standard
15866 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
15869 \begin_layout Standard
15870 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
15873 \begin_layout Enumerate
15877 \begin_inset space ~
15882 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
15883 \begin_inset space ~
15887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15889 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
15894 \begin_inset Index idx
15897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15898 Spaces ! inter-word
15906 \begin_layout Enumerate
15910 \begin_inset space ~
15915 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
15916 \begin_inset space ~
15920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15922 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
15927 \begin_inset Index idx
15930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15939 \begin_layout Enumerate
15943 \begin_inset space ~
15947 \begin_inset space ~
15951 \begin_inset space ~
15958 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15960 \begin_inset space ~
15965 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
15966 This function is also bound to
15969 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
15975 \begin_layout Standard
15976 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
15979 \begin_layout Itemize
15981 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15985 \begin_inset space \space{}
15988 this is too much space!
15991 \begin_layout Itemize
15992 This is I\SpecialChar \@.
15996 \begin_layout Standard
15997 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
15998 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because LaTeX
15999 will take care of this.
16002 \begin_layout Standard
16003 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16007 \begin_inset space ~
16012 feature described in the section
16018 Additional Features
16023 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16025 \begin_inset Index idx
16028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16029 Typography ! Quotes
16035 \begin_inset Index idx
16038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16069 \begin_layout Standard
16070 LyX usually sets quotes correctly.
16071 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16072 and use a closing quote at the end.
16074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16082 The keyboard character,
16086 , generates this automatically.
16089 \begin_layout Standard
16090 You can specify what character the
16094 key produces using the submenu
16100 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16104 \begin_inset Index idx
16107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16108 Document ! Settings
16118 There are six choices:
16121 \begin_layout Labeling
16122 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16145 \begin_layout Labeling
16146 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16149 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16153 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16159 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16163 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16169 \begin_layout Labeling
16170 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16173 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16177 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16183 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16187 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16193 \begin_layout Labeling
16194 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16197 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16201 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16207 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16211 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16217 \begin_layout Labeling
16218 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16221 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16225 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16231 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16235 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16241 \begin_layout Labeling
16242 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16245 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16249 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16255 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16259 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16265 \begin_layout Standard
16266 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
16269 arg "quote-insert single"
16275 \begin_layout Subsection
16277 \begin_inset Index idx
16280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16281 Typography ! Ligatures
16287 \begin_inset Index idx
16290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16319 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16321 name "sub:Ligatures"
16328 \begin_layout Standard
16329 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
16330 print them as single characters.
16331 These groups are known as
16336 Since LaTeX knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too
16338 Here are the standard ligatures:
16341 \begin_layout Itemize
16345 \begin_layout Itemize
16349 \begin_layout Itemize
16353 \begin_layout Itemize
16357 \begin_layout Itemize
16361 \begin_layout Standard
16362 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
16365 \begin_layout Standard
16366 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
16367 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
16368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16375 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
16376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16391 To break a ligature, use
16393 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16394 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16396 \begin_inset space ~
16403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16414 cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16431 Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
16433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16439 \begin_layout Subsection
16441 \begin_inset Index idx
16444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16451 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16453 name "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
16460 \begin_layout Standard
16461 You will certainly have noticed that the word “LaTeX” always appears with
16462 characters in different sizes and heights.
16463 LaTeX is the name of the program used by LyX and is therefore recognized
16464 as a proper name when you type it in LyX as
16465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16484 \begin_inset Note Note
16487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16488 The braces in TeX Code are here to avoid that the
16489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16496 appear as proper name in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
16497 To create proper names omit the TeX Code.
16502 Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! LyX recognizes the
16503 following proper names:
16506 \begin_layout Description
16507 LyX The name of the game, write
16508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16529 \begin_layout Description
16530 TeX The program used by LaTeX, write
16531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16552 \begin_layout Description
16553 LaTeX The program used by LyX, write
16554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16575 \begin_layout Description
16576 LaTeX2e The actual version of LaTeX, write
16577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16598 \begin_layout Standard
16599 You might wonder why the LaTeX-version is
16600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16604 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
16608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16612 It is an old tradition in the TeX-world to give programs geek version numbers.
16613 For example the version number of TeX converges to the number
16614 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
16617 : The actual version is
16618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16625 , the previous one was
16626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16636 \begin_layout Standard
16637 If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings,
16638 you can insert two empty braces in TeX Code in the word.
16639 In LyX this will look like
16640 \begin_inset Graphics
16641 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
16647 \begin_inset Newline newline
16650 For more about TeX Code, see section
16651 \begin_inset space ~
16655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16657 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
16664 \begin_layout Subsection
16666 \begin_inset Index idx
16669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16678 \begin_layout Standard
16679 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
16680 space between two words.
16681 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
16684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16691 for units use the menu
16693 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16694 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16696 \begin_inset space ~
16704 arg "space-insert thin"
16710 \begin_layout Standard
16711 Here is an example to show the differences:
16714 \begin_layout Standard
16715 \begin_inset Tabular
16716 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
16717 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
16718 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
16719 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
16721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16726 \begin_inset space ~
16730 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
16738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16742 space between number and unit
16749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16754 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16758 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
16766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16770 half space between number and unit
16783 \begin_layout Subsection
16785 \begin_inset Index idx
16788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16789 Typography ! Widows and orphans
16797 \begin_layout Standard
16798 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
16800 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
16801 You may remember once printing out a document, only to find the heading
16802 for a new section printed at the very bottom of the page, the first line
16803 of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom of a page, or the last line
16804 of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
16805 These bits of text became known as
16816 \begin_layout Standard
16817 Clearly, LyX can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
16818 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
16819 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
16820 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
16821 built into LaTeX governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there
16822 specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
16823 This is the advantage LyX has in using LaTeX as its backend.
16826 \begin_layout Standard
16827 We cannot go into how TeX and LaTeX decide to break a page, or how you can
16828 tweak that behavior.
16829 Some LaTeX books listed in the bibliography (such as
16830 \begin_inset space ~
16834 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
16836 key "latexcompanion"
16841 \begin_inset space ~
16845 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
16851 ) may have more information.
16852 You will almost never need to worry about this, however.
16855 \begin_layout Chapter
16856 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
16857 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16859 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
16866 \begin_layout Standard
16867 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
16870 \begin_inset space ~
16876 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
16879 \begin_layout Section
16881 \begin_inset Index idx
16884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16891 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16900 \begin_layout Standard
16901 LyX offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
16904 \begin_layout Description
16906 \begin_inset space ~
16909 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
16910 \begin_inset Newline newline
16914 \begin_inset Note Note
16917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16918 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
16926 \begin_layout Description
16927 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
16928 a LaTeX-comment when you export the document to LaTeX via the menu
16930 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16931 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16944 \begin_inset space ~
16950 \begin_inset Newline newline
16954 \begin_inset Note Comment
16957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16958 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in LaTeX-files.
16966 \begin_layout Description
16968 \begin_inset space ~
16971 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
16972 set in the document settings under
16974 Colors\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16976 \begin_inset space ~
16982 \begin_inset Newline newline
16986 \begin_inset Newline newline
16990 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
16993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16999 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17000 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17005 of a comment that appears in the output.
17011 \begin_inset Newline newline
17015 \begin_inset Newline newline
17018 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17021 \begin_layout Standard
17022 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17030 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17034 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17037 \begin_layout Section
17039 \begin_inset Index idx
17042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17049 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17051 name "sec:Footnotes"
17058 \begin_layout Standard
17059 LyX uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the
17062 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17065 or the toolbar button
17068 arg "footnote-insert"
17080 \begin_inset Graphics
17081 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17090 This box is LyX's representation of your footnote.
17100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17119 label, the box will
17123 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17124 Clicking on the box label again will close
17137 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17138 and click on the footnote
17153 \begin_layout Standard
17154 Here is an example footnote:
17162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17163 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17171 \begin_layout Standard
17172 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17173 position where the footnote box is placed.
17174 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17175 The footnote number is calculated by LyX according to the document class.
17176 LyX does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get
17177 other schemes using special LaTeX-commands.
17182 ey are described in the
17185 \begin_inset space ~
17193 \begin_layout Section
17195 \begin_inset Index idx
17198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17205 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17207 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17214 \begin_layout Standard
17215 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in LyX.
17216 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17218 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17220 \begin_inset space ~
17225 or the toolbar button
17228 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17254 appearing within your text.
17255 This box is LyX's representation of your margin
17264 \begin_layout Standard
17265 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17269 \begin_inset Marginal
17272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17274 This is a marginal note.
17282 \begin_layout Standard
17283 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17284 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17285 pages, right on odd pages.
17288 \begin_layout Standard
17289 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17292 \begin_inset space ~
17300 \begin_inset space ~
17308 \begin_layout Section
17309 Graphics and Images
17310 \begin_inset Index idx
17313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17320 \begin_inset Index idx
17323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17330 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17332 name "sec:Graphics"
17339 \begin_layout Standard
17340 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17341 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17344 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17349 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17353 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
17356 \begin_layout Standard
17357 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
17365 tab allows you to choose your image file.
17366 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
17368 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
17369 \begin_inset space ~
17373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17375 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
17382 \begin_layout Standard
17387 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
17388 of the image in the output.
17389 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
17393 \begin_inset space ~
17397 \begin_inset space ~
17406 \begin_inset space ~
17410 \begin_inset space ~
17414 \begin_inset space ~
17419 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
17420 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
17428 \begin_layout Standard
17435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17443 \begin_inset space ~
17447 \begin_inset space ~
17454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17463 tab LaTeX experts can specify additional LaTeX options.
17464 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside LyX.
17468 \begin_inset space ~
17473 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
17474 with the image size is printed.
17478 \begin_inset space ~
17482 \begin_inset space ~
17486 \begin_inset space ~
17491 is explained in the
17494 \begin_inset space ~
17506 \begin_layout Standard
17507 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
17508 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
17510 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
17513 \begin_layout Standard
17515 \begin_inset Graphics
17516 filename clipart/mobius.eps
17524 \begin_layout Standard
17525 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
17526 the image into a float, see section
17527 \begin_inset space ~
17531 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17533 reference "sub:Figure-Floats"
17540 \begin_layout Subsection
17542 \begin_inset Index idx
17545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17552 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17554 name "sub:Image-Formats"
17561 \begin_layout Standard
17562 You can insert images in any known file format.
17563 But as we explained in section
17564 \begin_inset space ~
17568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17570 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
17574 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
17575 LyX therefore uses the program
17579 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
17580 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
17581 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
17582 \begin_inset space ~
17586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17588 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
17595 \begin_layout Standard
17596 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
17599 \begin_layout Description
17601 \begin_inset space ~
17604 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
17605 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
17606 Well-known bitmap image formats are
17607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17610 Graphics Interchange Format
17611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17614 (GIF, file extension
17615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17627 \begin_inset Index idx
17630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17662 Portable Network Graphics
17663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17666 (PNG, file extension
17667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17679 \begin_inset Index idx
17682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17714 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17718 (JPG, file extension
17719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17743 \begin_inset Index idx
17746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17777 \begin_layout Description
17779 \begin_inset space ~
17782 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
17784 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
17785 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
17786 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
17787 \begin_inset Newline newline
17790 Scalable image formats can be
17791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17794 Scalable Vector Graphics
17795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17798 (SVG, file extension
17799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17811 \begin_inset Index idx
17814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17846 Encapsulated PostScript
17847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17850 (EPS, file extension
17851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17863 \begin_inset Index idx
17866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17898 Portable Document Format
17899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17902 (PDF, file extension
17903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17915 \begin_inset Index idx
17918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17933 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
17934 result will not be scalable.
17935 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
17940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17941 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
17949 \begin_layout Standard
17950 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
17957 \begin_layout Subsection
17958 Grouping of Image Settings
17959 \begin_inset Index idx
17962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17963 Images ! Settings grouping
17971 \begin_layout Standard
17972 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
17974 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
17975 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
17977 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
17978 need to manually change each of them.
17982 \begin_layout Standard
17983 A new group can be set by pressing the button
17986 \begin_inset space ~
17990 \begin_inset space ~
18005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18013 \begin_inset space ~
18017 \begin_inset space ~
18024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18034 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18035 and checking the name of the desired group.
18038 \begin_layout Section
18040 \begin_inset Index idx
18043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18050 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18059 \begin_layout Standard
18060 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18063 arg "tabular-insert"
18068 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18072 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18073 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18074 from the rest of the table.
18075 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18076 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18078 Here is an example table:
18081 \begin_layout Standard
18083 \begin_inset Tabular
18084 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18085 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
18086 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18087 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18088 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18089 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18289 \begin_layout Subsection
18293 \begin_layout Standard
18294 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18297 More\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18301 This brings up the table dialog.
18302 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18303 cursor is placed currently.
18304 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18305 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18306 done on all of your selection.
18309 \begin_layout Standard
18310 In addition to the table dialog, the
18313 \begin_inset space ~
18318 helps you in setting table properties.
18319 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18322 \begin_layout Standard
18326 \begin_inset space ~
18331 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18332 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18333 current cell respectively.
18334 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18336 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18337 of text, see section
18338 \begin_inset space ~
18342 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18344 reference "sub:Table-Cells"
18351 \begin_layout Standard
18352 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18353 using the check box
18362 This will merge the cells to
18366 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18367 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18368 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18369 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18370 in the last row without the upper border:
18373 \begin_layout Standard
18375 \begin_inset Tabular
18376 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
18377 <features rotate="0" firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
18378 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18379 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="0">
18380 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18381 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18392 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18401 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18477 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18512 \begin_layout Standard
18513 Adept users can declare special LaTeX-arguments for the table.
18514 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
18515 explained in the chapter
18522 \begin_inset space ~
18528 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table 90
18529 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18532 degrees counterclockwise.
18533 These rotations are not visible in LyX but are visible in the output.
18536 \begin_layout Standard
18537 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18545 Most DVI-viewers are
18549 able to display rotations.
18557 \begin_layout Standard
18562 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
18567 adds lines for all cell borders.
18570 \begin_layout Subsection
18572 \begin_inset Index idx
18575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18576 Tables ! Longtables
18582 \begin_inset Index idx
18585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18594 \begin_layout Standard
18595 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
18598 \begin_inset space ~
18602 \begin_inset space ~
18611 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
18612 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
18615 \begin_layout Description
18620 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18621 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
18622 except for the first page, if
18625 \begin_inset space ~
18633 \begin_layout Description
18637 \begin_inset space ~
18642 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
18643 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
18646 \begin_layout Description
18651 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18652 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
18653 except for the last page, if
18656 \begin_inset space ~
18664 \begin_layout Description
18668 \begin_inset space ~
18673 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
18674 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
18677 \begin_layout Description
18678 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
18679 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
18681 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18685 More about longtable captions can be found in the
18688 \begin_inset space ~
18696 \begin_layout Standard
18697 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
18698 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
18699 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
18705 In this context, first means first in this order:
18708 \begin_inset space ~
18720 \begin_inset space ~
18725 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
18728 \begin_layout Standard
18730 \begin_inset Tabular
18731 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
18732 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
18733 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
18734 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18735 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18736 <row endfirsthead="true">
18737 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18743 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
18748 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18757 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18767 <row endfirsthead="true">
18768 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18779 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18788 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18800 <row endhead="true">
18801 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18812 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18821 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18831 <row endhead="true">
18832 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18843 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18852 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18864 <row endfoot="true">
18865 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18876 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18885 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18916 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19857 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19866 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
19869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19875 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19886 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19917 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19948 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19979 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20010 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20041 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20072 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20103 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20134 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20165 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20196 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20227 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20258 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20289 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20320 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20351 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20382 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20413 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20444 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20475 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20506 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20537 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20568 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20599 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20630 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20661 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20692 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20723 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20754 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20785 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20816 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20846 <row endlastfoot="true">
20847 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20858 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20867 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20884 \begin_layout Subsection
20886 \begin_inset Index idx
20889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20896 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20898 name "sub:Table-Cells"
20905 \begin_layout Standard
20906 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
20907 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
20908 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
20909 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
20913 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
20916 \begin_layout Standard
20917 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
20918 for the column in the table dialog.
20919 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
20920 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
20924 \begin_layout Standard
20926 \begin_inset Tabular
20927 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
20928 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
20929 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20930 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
20931 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20951 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21020 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21076 This is longer now.
21081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21132 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21133 This is longer now.
21138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21164 \begin_layout Standard
21165 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21166 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21171 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21172 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21178 Selection with the mouse or with
21182 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21183 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21184 the selection from outside the table.
21187 \begin_layout Section
21189 \begin_inset Index idx
21192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21199 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21208 \begin_layout Subsection
21212 \begin_layout Standard
21213 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21214 have a fixed location.
21216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21223 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21231 \begin_inset space ~
21236 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21237 too many notes on the current page.
21240 \begin_layout Standard
21241 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21242 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21243 and pages without text.
21244 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21245 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21246 Floats are therefore numbered.
21247 Referencing is described in section
21248 \begin_inset space ~
21252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21254 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21261 \begin_layout Standard
21262 To insert a float, use the menu
21264 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21268 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21269 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21271 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21272 \begin_inset Index idx
21275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21281 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21282 paragraph within the float.
21283 To keep your LyX-document readable, you can open and close the float box
21284 by left-clicking on the box label.
21285 A closed float box looks like this:
21286 \begin_inset Graphics
21287 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21292 – a gray button with a red label.
21295 \begin_layout Standard
21296 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible LaTeX-errors
21297 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21300 \begin_layout Subsection
21304 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21306 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21308 name "sub:Figure-Floats"
21313 \begin_inset Index idx
21316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21317 Floats ! Figure floats
21325 \begin_layout Standard
21327 \begin_inset space ~
21331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21333 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21337 was created using the menu
21339 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21340 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21346 arg "float-insert figure"
21350 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21353 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21359 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21363 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21364 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
21366 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21368 \begin_inset space ~
21376 arg "layout-paragraph"
21382 \begin_layout Standard
21383 \begin_inset Float figure
21388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21390 \begin_inset Graphics
21391 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21401 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21404 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21406 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21410 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
21423 \begin_layout Standard
21424 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
21425 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
21427 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21436 ) and refer to it using the menu
21438 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21444 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
21448 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
21449 vague references like
21450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21457 , because, as LaTeX will reposition the floats in the final document, it
21459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21467 For more about cross-references, see section
21468 \begin_inset space ~
21472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21474 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21481 \begin_layout Standard
21482 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
21483 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
21484 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
21485 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
21486 as described in section
21487 \begin_inset space ~
21491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21493 reference "sub:List-of-Figures"
21499 \begin_inset space ~
21503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21505 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
21509 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
21510 You can also set the images one below the other.
21512 \begin_inset space ~
21516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21518 reference "fig:Undefinable"
21523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21525 reference "fig:Platypus"
21529 are the subfigures.
21532 \begin_layout Standard
21533 \begin_inset Float figure
21538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21539 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21543 \begin_inset Float figure
21548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21549 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21552 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21554 name "fig:Undefinable"
21566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21567 \begin_inset Graphics
21568 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
21579 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21583 \begin_inset Float figure
21588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21589 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21592 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21594 name "fig:Platypus"
21606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21607 \begin_inset Graphics
21608 filename clipart/platypus.eps
21620 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21627 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21630 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21632 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
21636 Two distorted images.
21649 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21651 \begin_inset Index idx
21654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21655 Floats ! Table floats
21663 \begin_layout Standard
21664 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
21666 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21667 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21670 or the toolbar button
21673 arg "float-insert table"
21677 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
21678 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
21679 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
21681 \begin_inset space ~
21685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21687 reference "tab:Table-float"
21694 \begin_layout Standard
21695 \begin_inset Float table
21700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21701 \begin_inset Caption Standard
21703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21704 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21706 name "tab:Table-float"
21718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21720 \begin_inset Tabular
21721 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
21722 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
21723 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21724 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21725 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21852 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
21860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21873 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
21876 \end{array}\right]$
21884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21897 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
21918 \begin_layout Subsection
21920 \begin_inset Index idx
21923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21932 \begin_layout Standard
21933 LyX offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
21934 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
21935 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
21937 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
21945 \begin_inset space ~
21953 \begin_layout Section
21955 \begin_inset Index idx
21958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21965 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21967 name "sec:Minipages"
21974 \begin_layout Standard
21975 LaTeX provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
21977 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
21978 \begin_inset space \space{}
21985 \begin_layout Standard
21986 Minipages in LyX have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
21988 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21992 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
21993 and its alignment within the page.
21996 \begin_layout Standard
21998 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22008 height_special "totalheight"
22011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22014 This is a minipage.
22015 The text is set in an italic style.
22018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22021 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22022 another formatting.
22030 \begin_layout Standard
22031 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22034 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22038 as described in section
22039 \begin_inset space ~
22043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22045 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
22050 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22056 \begin_layout Standard
22057 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22067 height_special "totalheight"
22070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22071 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22072 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22078 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22082 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22092 height_special "totalheight"
22095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22096 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22097 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22105 \begin_layout Standard
22106 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22112 \begin_layout Standard
22113 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22115 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22122 \begin_inset space ~
22130 \begin_layout Chapter
22131 Mathematical Formulas
22132 \begin_inset Index idx
22135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22142 \begin_inset Index idx
22145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22174 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22176 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22183 \begin_layout Standard
22184 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22189 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22192 \begin_layout Section
22194 \begin_inset Index idx
22197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22206 \begin_layout Standard
22207 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22220 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22222 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22223 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22224 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22226 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22232 \begin_layout Standard
22233 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22237 \begin_inset space ~
22242 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22245 \begin_layout Standard
22246 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22247 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22250 \begin_layout Standard
22251 This is a line with an inline formula
22252 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22258 \begin_layout Standard
22259 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22260 paragraph, like this one:
22261 \begin_inset Formula
22268 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22271 \begin_layout Standard
22272 LyX also supports many LaTeX math commands.
22273 For example, typing
22274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22287 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22288 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22292 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22295 \begin_inset space ~
22303 \begin_layout Subsection
22304 Navigating in Formulas
22305 \begin_inset Index idx
22308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22317 \begin_layout Standard
22318 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22319 achieved with the arrow keys.
22320 LyX uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22321 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22326 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22327 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22331 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22335 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22338 \end{array}\right]$
22346 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22351 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22352 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22355 \begin_layout Standard
22360 , printed in this document as
22361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22382 \begin_inset Note Note
22385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22386 This command will appear in the output as an official character denoting
22387 the space character (visible space).
22392 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22393 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22394 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22399 For example, if you want
22400 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
22411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22454 , since in the latter case only the
22457 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
22462 will be under the square root sign:
22463 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
22469 \begin_layout Standard
22470 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
22472 \begin_inset Formula
22474 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
22483 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
22484 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
22487 \begin_layout Subsection
22491 \begin_layout Standard
22492 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
22493 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
22497 and a cursor movement key to select text.
22498 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
22499 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
22500 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
22501 but not in a normal text region in LyX.
22504 \begin_layout Subsection
22505 Exponents and Subscripts
22506 \begin_inset Index idx
22509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22516 \begin_inset Index idx
22519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22528 \begin_layout Standard
22529 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
22532 arg "math-superscript"
22538 arg "math-subscript"
22541 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
22543 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
22546 , type in a formula
22552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22568 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
22574 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
22578 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
22587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22599 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
22601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22608 , you have to use an extra
22612 to separate the circumflex and the character.
22613 For example, if you want
22614 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
22623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22635 Subscripts are similar: To get
22636 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
22645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22659 \begin_layout Subsection
22661 \begin_inset Index idx
22664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22673 \begin_layout Standard
22674 Create a fraction either with the command
22680 or by using the icon
22683 arg "math-insert \\frac"
22689 \begin_inset space ~
22695 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
22696 The cursor is above the fraction line.
22697 To move it to the bottom, simply press
22702 To move back up, press
22707 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
22708 \begin_inset Formula
22710 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
22713 \end{array}\right)}\right]
22721 \begin_layout Subsection
22723 \begin_inset Index idx
22726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22735 \begin_layout Standard
22736 Roots can be created using the
22739 \begin_inset space ~
22747 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
22753 arg "math-insert \\root"
22775 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
22781 always produces a square root.
22784 \begin_layout Subsection
22785 Operators with Limits
22786 \begin_inset Index idx
22789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22796 \begin_inset Index idx
22799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22806 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22808 name "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
22815 \begin_layout Standard
22817 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
22821 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
22824 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
22825 These limits can be entered in LyX by entering them as you would enter
22826 a super- or subscript, directly after the symbol.
22827 The sum operator will automatically place its
22828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22835 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
22837 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
22841 \begin_inset Formula
22843 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
22848 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
22852 \begin_layout Standard
22853 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
22855 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
22856 behind the operator and using the menu
22858 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22859 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22861 \begin_inset space ~
22865 \begin_inset space ~
22879 \begin_layout Standard
22880 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
22881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22889 \begin_inset Index idx
22892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22899 \begin_inset Formula
22901 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
22906 which will place the
22907 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
22911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22919 In inline formulas it looks like this:
22920 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
22926 \begin_layout Standard
22927 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
22934 Have a look at section
22935 \begin_inset space ~
22939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22941 reference "sub:Functions"
22945 for an explanation of function macros.
22948 \begin_layout Subsection
22950 \begin_inset Index idx
22953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22962 \begin_layout Standard
22963 Most math symbols can be found in the
22966 \begin_inset space ~
22971 under one of several categories; including
22988 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
22992 \begin_layout Standard
22993 If you know the LaTeX-command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
22994 you don't have to use the
22997 \begin_inset space ~
23002 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23003 LyX will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23006 \begin_layout Subsection
23008 \begin_inset Index idx
23011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23020 \begin_layout Standard
23021 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23026 arg "command-alternatives space-insert protected ; math-space"
23032 \begin_inset space ~
23042 arg "math-insert \\space"
23048 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23049 For example, the sequence
23054 \begin_inset Formula $a\, b$
23058 \begin_inset Graphics
23059 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23064 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23065 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23066 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23067 Some markers for the space size appear red in LyX, because they are negative
23069 Here are two examples:
23072 \begin_layout Standard
23082 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23088 \begin_layout Standard
23098 \begin_inset Formula $a\! b$
23104 \begin_layout Subsection
23106 \begin_inset Index idx
23109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23116 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23118 name "sub:Functions"
23125 \begin_layout Standard
23129 \begin_inset space ~
23134 contains under the button
23139 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23144 a number of function macros, such as
23145 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23149 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23157 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23164 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23165 avoid confusions, because
23166 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23170 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23176 \begin_layout Standard
23177 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23179 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23183 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23189 \begin_layout Standard
23190 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23191 are placed, as described in section
23192 \begin_inset space ~
23196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23198 reference "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23205 \begin_layout Subsection
23207 \begin_inset Index idx
23210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23219 \begin_layout Standard
23220 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23222 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23223 You can also use LaTeX commands, for example, to enter
23224 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23227 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23228 Our example is entered by typing
23236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23249 \begin_inset space ~
23253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23255 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23259 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23262 \begin_layout Standard
23263 \begin_inset Float table
23268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23269 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23272 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23274 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23278 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23288 \begin_inset Tabular
23289 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23290 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
23291 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23292 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23293 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23377 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23431 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23485 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
23495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23539 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
23549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23593 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
23603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23647 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
23657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23701 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
23711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23755 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
23765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23809 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
23819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23854 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
23875 \begin_layout Standard
23876 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
23879 \begin_inset space ~
23887 arg "math-insert \\hat"
23890 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
23894 \begin_layout Section
23895 Brackets and Delimiters
23896 \begin_inset Index idx
23899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23906 \begin_inset Index idx
23909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23916 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23918 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
23925 \begin_layout Standard
23926 There are several brackets available through LyX.
23927 For some purposes, using just the keys
23932 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
23933 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
23934 toolbar delimiter icon
23937 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
23941 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
23942 \begin_inset Formula
23944 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
23952 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
23953 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
23957 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
23960 and the expression on the right was entered using the
23966 \begin_inset Formula
23968 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
23976 \begin_layout Standard
23977 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
23978 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
23982 \begin_layout Standard
23983 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
23984 left side and right side.
23985 If you use the option
23988 \begin_inset space ~
23993 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
23994 The selection will be shown below the button field.
23995 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use the blank button.
23996 It will appear in LyX with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
23999 \begin_layout Standard
24000 If you want to place brackets around math structures, like a square root,
24001 you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that is to
24002 go inside the brackets.
24003 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24008 The parentheses will be drawn around the selected structure.
24009 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24010 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24011 For example, to insert a pair of flexible parentheses on both sides, select
24012 the structure and enter
24015 arg "math-delim ( )"
24021 \begin_layout Section
24022 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24023 \begin_inset Index idx
24026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24033 \begin_inset Index idx
24036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24043 \begin_inset Index idx
24046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24047 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24055 \begin_layout Standard
24056 Matrices are entered in LyX using the
24059 \begin_inset space ~
24069 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24075 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24076 Here is an example:
24077 \begin_inset Formula
24079 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24088 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24089 \begin_inset space ~
24093 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24095 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24100 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24101 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24102 This alignment is set in the box
24107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24155 for every column as default.
24156 For example, the sequence
24157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24168 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24169 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24170 corresponds to the relevant column.
24171 The result will look like this:
24172 \begin_inset Formula
24175 this & this\, column & this\, column\\
24176 column & has & has\, right\\
24177 has\, left\, alignment & center\, alignment & alignment
24186 \begin_layout Standard
24187 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24190 arg "newline-insert newline"
24193 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24194 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24196 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24199 or the math toolbar.
24202 \begin_layout Standard
24203 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24204 It can be created with the menu
24206 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24207 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24209 \begin_inset space ~
24221 Here is an example:
24222 \begin_inset Formula
24236 \begin_layout Standard
24237 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24240 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24243 arg "newline-insert newline"
24247 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24252 arg "newline-insert newline"
24255 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24263 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24264 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24265 A new row is created by every further entry of
24268 arg "newline-insert newline"
24272 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24273 Here is an example:
24274 \begin_inset Formula
24276 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24277 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24282 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24283 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24284 \begin_inset Formula
24286 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24294 \begin_layout Standard
24295 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24302 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24303 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24306 reference "eq:asquared"
24311 The other types are described in section
24312 \begin_inset space ~
24316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24318 reference "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
24325 \begin_layout Section
24326 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24327 \begin_inset Index idx
24330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24331 Math ! Formula numbering
24337 \begin_inset Index idx
24340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24341 Math ! Referencing formulas
24347 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24349 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24356 \begin_layout Standard
24357 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24359 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24360 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24362 \begin_inset space ~
24366 \begin_inset space ~
24374 arg "math-number-toggle"
24378 The formula number appears in LyX within parentheses.
24379 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24380 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24381 the document class.
24382 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24383 separated by a dot:
24384 \begin_inset Formula
24394 arg "math-number-toggle"
24397 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24398 You can only number displayed formulas.
24401 \begin_layout Standard
24402 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24404 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24405 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24407 \begin_inset space ~
24411 \begin_inset space ~
24419 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24422 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24423 \begin_inset Formula
24426 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24432 To number all lines use the shortcut
24435 arg "math-number-toggle"
24441 \begin_layout Standard
24442 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24445 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24446 A label is inserted with the menu
24448 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24457 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24458 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24459 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24471 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24472 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24473 We inserted in the following example the label
24474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24481 in the second line:
24482 \begin_inset Formula
24484 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
24485 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
24490 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
24491 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
24492 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
24494 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24496 \begin_inset space ~
24504 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24508 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
24509 The reference appears in LyX as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
24510 as the formula number:
24513 \begin_layout Standard
24514 This is a cross-reference to equation (
24515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24517 reference "eq:tanhExp"
24524 \begin_layout Standard
24525 The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section
24526 \begin_inset space ~
24530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24532 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24537 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
24545 \begin_layout Section
24546 User defined math macros
24547 \begin_inset Index idx
24550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24559 \begin_layout Standard
24560 LyX allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
24561 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
24562 Math macros are explained in section
24565 \begin_inset space ~
24577 \begin_layout Section
24581 \begin_layout Subsection
24583 \begin_inset Index idx
24586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24595 \begin_layout Standard
24596 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
24597 To set a font in a formula, use the
24600 \begin_inset space ~
24610 arg "math-insert \\font"
24615 , or enter its command, listed in table
24616 \begin_inset space ~
24620 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24622 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24629 \begin_layout Standard
24630 \begin_inset Float table
24635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24636 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24639 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24641 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
24645 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
24653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24655 \begin_inset Tabular
24656 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
24657 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
24658 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24659 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24691 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
24699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24718 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
24726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24745 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
24753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24778 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
24786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24805 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
24813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24832 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
24840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24866 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
24874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24893 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
24901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24927 \begin_layout Standard
24928 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
24931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24936 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
24952 \begin_layout Standard
24953 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
24954 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
24959 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
24960 space when you need a space in the box.
24961 Here is an example where
24962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24973 denotes the set of numbers:
24974 \begin_inset Formula
24976 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\: x\in\mathbb{N}
24984 \begin_layout Standard
24985 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
24986 You can, for example, put a character in
24995 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
24999 \begin_inset Newline newline
25002 So it is better not to use this feature.
25005 \begin_layout Standard
25006 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25007 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25011 \begin_inset Newline newline
25014 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25020 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25021 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25027 \begin_layout Standard
25034 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25037 \begin_layout Standard
25038 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25040 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25041 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25043 \begin_inset space ~
25051 \begin_layout Subsection
25053 \begin_inset Index idx
25056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25065 \begin_layout Standard
25066 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25068 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25072 \begin_inset space ~
25076 \begin_inset space ~
25084 \begin_inset space ~
25094 arg "math-insert \\font"
25106 Math text appears in LyX in black instead of blue.
25107 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25108 Here is an example:
25109 \begin_inset Formula
25112 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25113 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25122 \begin_layout Subsection
25124 \begin_inset Index idx
25127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25136 \begin_layout Standard
25137 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25138 automatically chosen in most situations.
25156 For most characters,
25164 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25165 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25170 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25171 situations, all text will be set in the styles that LaTeX thinks are appropriat
25173 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25178 arg "math-insert \\style"
25184 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25185 For example, you can set
25186 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25189 , which is normally in
25198 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25202 The four styles are used in the following example:
25205 \begin_layout Standard
25206 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25210 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25214 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25218 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25224 \begin_layout Standard
25225 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25226 is set in a particular size with the menu
25228 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25230 \begin_inset space ~
25235 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25236 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25237 will be adjusted to correspond.
25238 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25249 \begin_layout Standard
25253 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25259 \begin_layout Section
25261 \begin_inset Index idx
25264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25271 \begin_inset Index idx
25274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25283 \begin_layout Standard
25284 LyX supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society
25285 (AMS) that are in common use.
25288 \begin_layout Subsection
25289 Enabling AMS-Support
25292 \begin_layout Standard
25293 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25294 the document by selecting the checkbox
25297 \begin_inset space ~
25301 \begin_inset space ~
25305 \begin_inset space ~
25312 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25316 \begin_inset Index idx
25319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25320 Document ! Settings
25328 \begin_inset space ~
25334 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get LaTeX-errors in
25335 formulas, ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25338 \begin_layout Subsection
25340 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25342 name "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
25347 \begin_inset Index idx
25350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25351 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25359 \begin_layout Standard
25360 AMS-LaTeX provides a selection of different formula types.
25361 LyX allows you to choose between
25382 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25383 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25389 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25392 \begin_layout Chapter
25396 \begin_layout Section
25398 \begin_inset Index idx
25401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25408 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25410 name "sec:Cross-References"
25417 \begin_layout Standard
25418 One of LyX's strengths is cross-references.
25419 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25421 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25422 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25423 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25426 \begin_layout Enumerate
25430 \begin_layout Enumerate
25431 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25433 name "enu:Second-item"
25440 \begin_layout Enumerate
25444 \begin_layout Standard
25445 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25447 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25450 or by pressing the toolbar button
25457 A gray label box like this:
25458 \begin_inset Graphics
25459 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25464 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25465 LyX offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25500 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted, e.
25501 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
25505 \begin_inset space \space{}
25508 if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix will
25510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25524 \begin_layout Standard
25525 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
25527 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25530 or the toolbar button
25533 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25537 A gray cross-reference box like this:
25538 \begin_inset Graphics
25539 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
25544 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
25546 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
25547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25559 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
25563 \begin_layout Standard
25566 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25569 , you can right-click on a label and use in the appearing context menu
25574 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
25575 to the actual cursor position via the menu
25577 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25589 \begin_layout Standard
25590 Here is our cross-reference: Item
25591 \begin_inset space ~
25595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25597 reference "enu:Second-item"
25604 \begin_layout Standard
25605 It is recommended to use a protected space
25609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25610 described in section
25611 \begin_inset space ~
25615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25617 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
25626 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
25627 line breaks between them.
25630 \begin_layout Standard
25631 There are six formats of cross-references:
25634 \begin_layout Description
25635 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
25636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25638 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25645 \begin_layout Description
25646 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
25647 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
25649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25659 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25666 \begin_layout Description
25667 <page>: prints the page number: Page
25668 \begin_inset space ~
25672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25673 LatexCommand pageref
25674 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25681 \begin_layout Description
25683 \begin_inset space ~
25687 \begin_inset space ~
25690 <page>: prints the text "on page" and the page number:
25691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25692 LatexCommand vpageref
25693 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25700 \begin_layout Description
25702 \begin_inset space ~
25706 \begin_inset space ~
25710 \begin_inset space ~
25713 <page>: prints the number, the text "on page", and the page number:
25714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25716 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25723 \begin_layout Description
25725 \begin_inset space ~
25728 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
25729 \begin_inset Newline newline
25733 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25741 This feature is only available when you have the LaTeX-package
25750 \begin_inset Index idx
25753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25754 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
25760 \begin_inset Index idx
25763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25764 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
25775 \begin_inset Newline newline
25778 You can select which LaTeX-package should be used for this feature by setting
25781 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
25785 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25786 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25794 is the default and preferred because
25798 supports only English documents.
25799 The format is specified by using the command
25811 (refstyle) in the LaTeX preamble of the document.
25812 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
25814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25825 ) can be done with this command
25826 \begin_inset Newline newline
25833 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
25838 \begin_inset Newline newline
25841 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
25843 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25845 key "prettyref,refstyle"
25852 \begin_layout Description
25854 \begin_inset space ~
25857 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
25858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25859 LatexCommand nameref
25860 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
25867 \begin_layout Standard
25872 will not print the page number if the label is on the previous, the same,
25875 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
25879 \begin_inset space \space{}
25883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25897 <reference> on page <page>
25899 will not print anything about the page if the label is on the same page.
25902 \begin_layout Standard
25903 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
25904 is automatically calculated by LaTeX.
25905 The varieties are adjusted in the field
25909 of the cross-reference window, that appear when you click on the cross-referenc
25913 \begin_layout Standard
25914 You can only use the style
25918 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
25922 is always possible.
25925 \begin_layout Standard
25926 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
25927 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
25929 Referencing formulas is explained in section
25930 \begin_inset space ~
25934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25936 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
25943 \begin_layout Standard
25944 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
25948 \begin_inset space ~
25952 \begin_inset space ~
25957 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
25958 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
25961 \begin_inset space ~
25966 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
25967 You can also go back with the toolbar button
25970 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
25976 \begin_layout Standard
25977 You can change labels at any time.
25978 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
25979 do not need to think about this.
25982 \begin_layout Standard
25983 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see two question
25984 marks in the output instead of the reference.
25987 \begin_layout Standard
25988 References are described in detail in sec.
25989 \begin_inset space ~
25993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26003 \begin_inset space ~
26011 \begin_layout Section
26012 Table of Contents and other Listings
26013 \begin_inset Index idx
26016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26023 \begin_inset Index idx
26026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26033 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26042 \begin_layout Subsection
26044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26046 name "sub:Table-of-Contents"
26053 \begin_layout Standard
26054 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26056 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26057 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26059 \begin_inset space ~
26063 \begin_inset space ~
26069 It is displayed in LyX as a gray box.
26070 If you click on it, the
26074 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26075 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26076 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26078 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26081 that is described in sec.
26082 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
26086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26088 reference "sub:The-Outliner"
26095 \begin_layout Standard
26096 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26097 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26099 \begin_inset space ~
26103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26105 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26109 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26111 \begin_inset space ~
26115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26117 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
26121 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26123 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26126 \begin_layout Subsection
26127 List of Figures, Tables, and Algorithms
26128 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26130 name "sub:List-of-Figures"
26137 \begin_layout Standard
26138 Table, figure, and algorithm lists are very much like the table of contents.
26139 You can insert them via the
26141 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26143 \begin_inset space ~
26147 \begin_inset space ~
26153 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26156 \begin_layout Section
26157 URLs and Hyperlinks
26158 \begin_inset Index idx
26161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26168 \begin_inset Index idx
26171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26180 \begin_layout Subsection
26182 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26191 \begin_layout Standard
26192 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26194 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26200 \begin_layout Standard
26201 Here is an example URL: LyX's homepage:
26202 \begin_inset Flex URL
26205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26215 \begin_layout Standard
26216 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26222 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26226 \begin_layout Standard
26227 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26235 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get LaTeX errors.
26243 \begin_layout Subsection
26245 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26247 name "sub:Hyperlinks"
26254 \begin_layout Standard
26255 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26257 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26260 or with the toolbar button
26267 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26276 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26277 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26278 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26280 name "LyX's homepage"
26281 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26285 , an Email address like this:
26286 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26288 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26289 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26294 , or a link to a file.
26297 \begin_layout Standard
26298 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26311 to the link target.
26314 \begin_layout Standard
26315 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26316 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26317 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26318 the text style dialog.
26319 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26323 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26325 name "LyX's homepage"
26326 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26333 \begin_layout Standard
26334 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26338 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26340 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26341 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26345 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26347 \begin_inset Newline newline
26355 \begin_inset Newline newline
26362 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26365 \begin_layout Section
26367 \begin_inset Index idx
26370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26377 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26379 name "sec:Appendices"
26386 \begin_layout Standard
26387 Appendices are created with the menu
26389 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26391 \begin_inset space ~
26395 \begin_inset space ~
26401 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26402 as the appendix region.
26403 The region is marked with a red borderline.
26406 \begin_layout Standard
26407 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix region is treated as an appendix,
26408 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26409 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26410 and the subsection number.
26411 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26415 \begin_layout Standard
26417 \begin_inset space ~
26421 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26423 reference "chap:Credits"
26428 \begin_inset space ~
26432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26434 reference "sub:Export"
26441 \begin_layout Section
26443 \begin_inset Index idx
26446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26453 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26455 name "sec:Bibliography"
26462 \begin_layout Standard
26463 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a LyX-document.
26464 You can include a bibliography database,
26468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26469 Known under the name
26470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26482 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26483 manually, using the paragraph environment
26487 , which was described in section
26488 \begin_inset space ~
26492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26494 reference "sub:Biblio_environment"
26499 If you want anything other than numerical citations that are used in this
26500 document, like author-year citations, then you must
26504 use a bibliography database.
26507 \begin_layout Subsection
26508 The Bibliography Environment
26511 \begin_layout Standard
26516 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
26518 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
26527 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
26529 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about LaTeX
26531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26538 , a short form of its title, as the key.
26541 \begin_layout Standard
26542 You can refer to the key of a bibliography entry using the menu
26544 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26547 or the toolbar button
26550 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
26554 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
26555 in which you can select one or more keys in the available key list.
26556 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key.
26557 When you click on the box, the citation window appears and you can change
26561 \begin_layout Standard
26562 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
26563 entry with surrounding brackets.
26568 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
26569 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
26571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26581 \begin_layout Standard
26584 LaTeX Companion Second Edition
26587 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26589 key "latexcompanion"
26596 \begin_layout Standard
26597 The LyX-Team members are listed in the Credits:
26598 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26607 \begin_layout Subsection
26608 Bibliography databases (BibTeX)
26609 \begin_inset Index idx
26612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26613 Bibliography ! Databases
26619 \begin_inset Index idx
26622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26623 Bibliography ! BibTeX
26629 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26631 name "sub:Bibliography-databases"
26638 \begin_layout Standard
26639 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
26644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26645 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
26647 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
26648 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
26653 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
26655 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
26656 your working field in a database.
26657 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
26658 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
26659 list for that document.
26660 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
26664 \begin_layout Standard
26665 The database is a text file with the file extension
26666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26677 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
26678 The format is explained in
26679 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26685 and in LaTeX books (
26686 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26688 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
26693 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
26694 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
26695 A list of such programs is maintained on the LyX Wiki at
26696 \begin_inset Flex URL
26699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26701 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
26709 \begin_layout Standard
26710 To use a database, use the menu
26712 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26717 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26730 \begin_inset space ~
26736 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
26737 In this window you can load one or more databases and a style file.
26740 Add bibliography to TOC
26742 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
26747 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
26748 in the document or just the cited references.
26751 \begin_layout Standard
26752 The style file is a text file with the file extension
26753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26764 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
26765 Your LaTeX distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
26766 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
26768 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
26773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26774 For information on how this is done, have a look at
26775 \begin_inset Newline newline
26779 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26781 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
26793 \begin_layout Standard
26794 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
26797 \begin_layout Standard
26798 To generate the bibliography from a database, LyX uses the program BibTeX.
26799 You can choose which of its variants should be used by LyX as the processor
26800 either in the document settings under
26804 or in LyX's preferences under
26806 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26821 The following variants are possible:
26824 \begin_layout Description
26825 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, does not work with
26826 other bibliography packages (like e.
26827 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
26831 \begin_inset space ~
26838 ), only with the package
26842 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
26846 \begin_layout Description
26847 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
26848 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
26849 with all bibliography packages, except of
26854 \begin_layout Description
26855 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in a 8-bit encoding,
26860 , works with all bibliography packages
26863 \begin_layout Standard
26864 BibTeX can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
26866 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended to read the manual of
26872 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26881 \begin_layout Standard
26882 When you select the option
26884 Sectioned bibliography
26888 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26891 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
26892 This and other options are explained in detail in section
26894 Customizing Bibliographies
26902 Additional Features
26907 \begin_layout Standard
26908 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
26909 the two methods of creating them.
26910 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
26911 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
26912 We used the style file
26916 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
26919 \begin_layout Subsection
26920 Bibliography layout
26921 \begin_inset Index idx
26924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26925 Bibliography ! Layout
26933 \begin_layout Standard
26934 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
26935 For this feature you need to enable the option
26941 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26945 \begin_inset Index idx
26948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26949 Document ! Settings
26959 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
26960 For the global citation format use the BibTeX style files as explained
26961 in the previous section.
26964 \begin_layout Standard
26965 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
26966 the citation reference window.
26967 Here is an example where the text
26968 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26972 \begin_inset space ~
26976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26979 appears after the reference:
26982 \begin_layout Standard
26984 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26987 key "latexcompanion"
26994 \begin_layout Section
26996 \begin_inset Index idx
26999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27006 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27015 \begin_layout Standard
27016 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27018 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27020 \begin_inset space ~
27025 or the toolbar button
27032 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27033 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27034 by LyX as the index entry.
27037 \begin_layout Standard
27038 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27040 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27042 \begin_inset space ~
27046 \begin_inset space ~
27049 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27051 \begin_inset space ~
27057 A light blue box labeled
27058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27069 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27070 The index list box is not clickable like other LyX-boxes.
27073 \begin_layout Standard
27074 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27075 For a detailed description of LaTeX's index mechanism, have a look at one
27077 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27079 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27086 \begin_layout Subsection
27087 Grouping Index Entries
27088 \begin_inset Index idx
27091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27100 \begin_layout Standard
27101 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27103 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27104 lists under the entry
27105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27113 First we create the entry
27114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27122 \begin_inset space ~
27126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27128 reference "sub:Lists"
27133 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27134 \begin_inset space ~
27138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27140 reference "sec:Itemize"
27144 , we insert the command
27147 \begin_layout Standard
27153 \begin_layout Standard
27157 \begin_layout Standard
27163 \begin_layout Standard
27164 for the enumerated list in section
27165 \begin_inset space ~
27169 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27171 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27178 \begin_layout Standard
27179 The exclamation mark
27180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27187 marks the grouping levels.
27188 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27189 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27190 If we don't have an index entry for
27191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27198 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27201 \begin_layout Subsection
27203 \begin_inset Index idx
27206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27207 Index ! Page ranges
27215 \begin_layout Standard
27216 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27218 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27220 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27224 \begin_inset space \space{}
27227 if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create an index entry
27229 \begin_inset space ~
27233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27235 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27242 \begin_layout Standard
27245 Paragraph environments|(
27248 \begin_layout Standard
27249 and another entry at the end of section
27250 \begin_inset space ~
27254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27256 reference "sub:LyX-Code"
27263 \begin_layout Standard
27266 Paragraph environments|)
27269 \begin_layout Standard
27271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27294 respectively start and end the index range.
27295 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27296 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27297 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27298 An example is the index entry
27299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27302 Document ! Settings
27303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27309 \begin_layout Subsection
27311 \begin_inset Index idx
27314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27315 Index ! Cross referencing
27323 \begin_layout Standard
27324 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27325 We referred for example in the index entry
27326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27334 \begin_inset space ~
27338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27340 reference "sub:Image-Formats"
27344 ) to the index entry
27345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27352 in the same section using the entry
27355 \begin_layout Standard
27358 GIF|see{Image formats}
27361 \begin_layout Standard
27362 where the braces have to be inserted as TeX Code.
27363 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27364 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27367 \begin_layout Subsection
27369 \begin_inset Index idx
27372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27373 Index ! Entry order
27381 \begin_layout Standard
27382 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27383 follow the rules for the index order.
27384 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but LaTeX
27388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27389 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27391 \begin_inset space ~
27395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27397 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27406 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27407 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27432 \begin_inset Index idx
27435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27436 Dummy entries ! maïs
27442 \begin_inset Index idx
27445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27446 Dummy entries ! maître
27452 \begin_inset Index idx
27455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27456 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27461 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27462 maïs, maison, maître.
27463 To achieve this, we use the command
27466 \begin_layout Standard
27469 previous entry@current entry
27472 \begin_layout Standard
27473 In our case we want to have
27474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27489 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
27492 \begin_layout Standard
27498 \begin_layout Standard
27499 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
27500 You can also use another word to tell LaTeX the entry order.
27501 See the next subsection for an example.
27504 \begin_layout Standard
27505 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27511 \begin_layout Standard
27512 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
27517 to generate the index (see sec.
27518 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27524 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27533 would for example print the index entry for the LaTeX-package aeguill in
27535 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27541 reference "sub:Document-Font"
27545 after the index entries of the other LaTeX-packages although all these
27546 index commands start with
27547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27559 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
27564 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
27567 \begin_layout Standard
27579 \begin_layout Standard
27591 \begin_layout Subsection
27593 \begin_inset Index idx
27596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27597 Index ! Entry layout
27605 \begin_layout Standard
27606 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
27607 \begin_inset Index idx
27610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27613 This is an italic dummy entry
27618 You can also format the page number using the character
27619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27626 followed by a LaTeX-command without a backslash.
27627 We can write for example
27630 \begin_layout Standard
27633 italic page number:|textit
27636 \begin_layout Standard
27637 to get the page number in italic.
27638 \begin_inset Index idx
27641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27642 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
27647 Normally all LaTeX-commands begin with a backslash, but in this special
27649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27665 \begin_inset space ~
27671 Have a look at section
27672 \begin_inset space ~
27676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27678 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
27682 to learn more about the LaTeX-syntax.
27685 \begin_layout Standard
27686 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27694 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
27698 to generate the index, see sec.
27699 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27705 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27714 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
27719 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
27720 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27723 key "latexcompanion"
27735 \begin_layout Standard
27736 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
27738 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
27739 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
27740 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
27741 If so, put the following in the preamble
27744 \begin_layout Standard
27756 \begin_layout Standard
27760 \begin_layout Standard
27766 \begin_layout Standard
27767 in the index entry.
27768 \begin_inset Index idx
27771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27772 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
27777 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
27778 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
27779 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
27782 \begin_layout Standard
27783 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
27785 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27789 \begin_inset space \space{}
27792 we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get a bold font
27793 for all index entries.
27794 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
27806 documentation for details,
27807 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27809 key "makeindex,xindy"
27816 \begin_layout Subsection
27818 \begin_inset Index idx
27821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27828 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27830 name "sub:Index-Program"
27837 \begin_layout Standard
27838 If the index entry program
27842 is installed, LyX uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
27846 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, is used.
27850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27855 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
27856 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
27857 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
27858 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
27859 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
27869 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences
27870 dialog, see section
27871 \begin_inset space ~
27875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27877 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
27882 The available options are listed and explained in
27883 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27885 key "makeindex,xindy"
27890 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
27894 \begin_layout Standard
27895 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
27896 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar \slash{}
27899 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27900 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27904 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
27905 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
27908 \begin_layout Subsection
27912 \begin_layout Standard
27913 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
27914 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
27915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27922 next to the standard index.
27923 LaTeX does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
27924 that add this feature.
27930 \begin_inset Index idx
27933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27934 LaTeX-packages ! splitidx
27939 package to generate multiple indexes.
27940 The package is included in all recent LaTeX distributions.
27944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27945 If yours does not ship it, consult the TeX-catalogue,
27946 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27953 Note that the package does not only consist of a LaTeX style, but it also
27954 includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
27955 Please consult the package's manual for details.
27963 \begin_layout Standard
27964 To set up LyX for the use of multiple indexes, go to
27966 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27967 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27970 and select the option
27972 Use multiple Indexes
27979 already contains the standard index
27980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27988 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
27989 also appear as a heading) to the
27993 input field and press the
27998 The new index now also appears in the list.
27999 If you like, you can attribute an alternative LyX label color to the new
28003 \begin_layout Standard
28004 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28007 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28009 \begin_inset space ~
28013 \begin_inset space ~
28022 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28023 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28024 are additional features:
28027 \begin_layout Itemize
28028 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28029 on the entries' label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28032 \begin_layout Itemize
28033 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28034 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28043 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28045 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28048 g., if you use a book class, where the standard index heading is defined
28049 as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can thus be nested
28050 to the non-subindexes.
28053 \begin_layout Section
28054 Nomenclature / Glossary
28055 \begin_inset Index idx
28058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28065 \begin_inset Index idx
28068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28097 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28099 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28106 \begin_layout Standard
28107 Sometimes you need to compile a list of symbols that are mentioned in your
28108 document with a brief explanation of them – a so called nomenclature or
28112 \begin_layout Standard
28113 To be able to create nomenclatures, you need the LaTeX package
28118 \begin_inset Index idx
28121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28122 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
28128 You find it in the TeX-catalogue,
28129 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28135 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
28138 \begin_layout Standard
28139 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28140 and then use the menu
28142 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28148 \begin_inset space ~
28153 or the toolbar button
28156 arg "nomencl-insert"
28161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28172 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28175 \begin_layout Standard
28176 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28177 The first is the symbol that you want to refer to.
28178 The second is the description of the symbol.
28181 \begin_layout Standard
28182 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28190 You have to enter valid LaTeX-code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28198 \begin_layout Subsection
28199 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28200 \begin_inset Index idx
28203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28204 Nomenclature ! Layout
28212 \begin_layout Standard
28213 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28217 field as LaTeX-formulas.
28219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28223 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28231 \begin_inset Newline newline
28239 \begin_inset Newline newline
28245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28252 character starts/ends the formula.
28253 The LaTeX-command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning
28255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28265 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28275 \begin_layout Standard
28276 (A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
28277 \begin_inset space ~
28281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28283 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28290 \begin_layout Standard
28294 \begin_inset space ~
28299 dialog to format the description text; you have to use LaTeX-commands.
28300 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28305 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28312 in this document is:
28313 \begin_inset Newline newline
28318 dummy entry for the character
28323 \begin_inset Newline newline
28335 \begin_inset space ~
28345 font use the command
28374 \begin_layout Standard
28375 If the characters |
28376 \begin_inset space \space{}
28380 \begin_inset space \space{}
28384 \begin_inset space \space{}
28388 \begin_inset space \space{}
28392 \begin_inset space \space{}
28395 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28396 a quote character in front of them.
28397 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28398 LatexCommand nomenclature
28399 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28400 description "The quote sign is output by writing ' \"\"\"\" '"
28407 \begin_layout Subsection
28408 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28409 \begin_inset Index idx
28412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28413 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28421 \begin_layout Standard
28422 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the LaTeX-code of
28423 the symbol definition.
28424 This leads to undesired results when you for example have symbols in formulas.
28425 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28428 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28429 LatexCommand nomenclature
28431 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28438 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28442 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28443 LatexCommand nomenclature
28446 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28451 They will be sorted by
28452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28478 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28481 will be sorted before the
28485 since the character
28486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28493 is considered in sorting.
28496 \begin_layout Standard
28497 To control the sort order, you can edit the
28500 \begin_inset space ~
28505 field of the nomenclature dialog.
28506 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
28508 For the example given, you can insert
28512 in this field for the
28513 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28520 will be located before
28521 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28527 \begin_layout Standard
28528 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
28533 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28542 \begin_layout Subsection
28543 Nomenclature Options
28544 \begin_inset Index idx
28547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28548 Nomenclature ! Options
28556 \begin_layout Standard
28561 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
28562 Here are some of its options, for more have a look at its documentation:
28565 \begin_layout Description
28566 refeq Appends the phrase
28567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28582 to every nomenclature entry, where
28588 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
28591 \begin_layout Description
28592 refpage Appends the phrase
28593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28608 to every nomenclature entry, where
28614 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
28617 \begin_layout Description
28618 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
28621 \begin_layout Standard
28622 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
28623 class options list in the
28625 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28629 In this document the options
28636 \begin_layout Standard
28637 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28643 \begin_layout Standard
28644 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
28645 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
28650 field in the nomenclature dialog:
28653 \begin_layout Description
28663 \begin_layout Description
28666 nomrefpage Like the
28673 \begin_layout Description
28676 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
28685 \begin_layout Description
28689 \begin_inset space ~
28695 \begin_inset space ~
28700 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
28703 \begin_layout Standard
28705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28712 are automatically translated for some document languages.
28713 If not, add these lines to your LaTeX preamble:
28716 \begin_layout Standard
28724 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
28727 \begin_inset Newline newline
28734 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
28739 \begin_inset Newline newline
28743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28758 by their translation.
28761 \begin_layout Subsection
28762 Printing the Nomenclature
28763 \begin_inset Index idx
28766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28767 Nomenclature ! Printing
28775 \begin_layout Standard
28776 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
28778 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28780 \begin_inset space ~
28784 \begin_inset space ~
28787 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28803 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
28804 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
28805 You can choose between these settings:
28808 \begin_layout Description
28809 Default a space of 1
28810 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28816 \begin_layout Description
28818 \begin_inset space ~
28822 \begin_inset space ~
28825 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
28828 \begin_layout Description
28829 Custom custom space
28832 \begin_layout Standard
28833 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
28834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28842 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
28850 For example, in order to change the name to
28854 , add the following line to the preamble:
28857 \begin_layout Standard
28865 nomname}{List of Symbols}
28868 \begin_layout Subsection
28869 Nomenclature Program
28870 \begin_inset Index idx
28873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28874 Nomenclature ! Program
28880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28882 name "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
28889 \begin_layout Standard
28890 LyX uses the program
28894 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
28895 LyX's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
28900 by adding options, see section
28901 \begin_inset space ~
28905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28907 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
28912 The available options are listed and explained in
28913 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28915 key "nomencl,makeindex"
28922 \begin_layout Section
28924 \begin_inset Index idx
28927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28934 \begin_inset Index idx
28937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28938 Document ! Branches
28944 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28946 name "sec:Branches"
28953 \begin_layout Standard
28954 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
28955 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
28956 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
28957 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
28960 \begin_layout Standard
28961 For these cases LyX allows you to put text into branches.
28962 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
28963 To create a branch, either select the menu
28965 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28966 Branch\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28969 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
28971 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28978 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
28979 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
28980 its background color inside LyX and whether the name of the branch should
28981 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
28982 (see below for an example).
28983 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
28984 to the name of the other) and to add
28985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28993 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28997 \begin_inset space ~
29000 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29001 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29004 \begin_layout Standard
29005 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29006 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29008 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29011 where you can choose a branch.
29012 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29016 \begin_layout Standard
29017 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29018 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29021 \begin_layout Standard
29022 \begin_inset Branch Question
29025 \begin_layout Standard
29026 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29034 \begin_layout Standard
29035 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29038 \begin_layout Standard
29039 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29047 \begin_layout Standard
29054 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29055 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29058 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29059 Consider for example a file
29060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29067 which has the above branches.
29069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29076 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29081 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29100 branch were inactive,
29101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29116 branch was active, likewise
29117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29132 branch was active, and
29133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29136 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29140 if both branches were active.
29141 This helps you to easily export different versions of your document without
29145 \begin_layout Standard
29146 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29152 \begin_layout Standard
29153 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29154 like inside equations, you can code special LaTeX definitions for each
29156 For example you can define for the question branch
29160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29161 For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section
29162 \begin_inset space ~
29166 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29168 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29180 \begin_layout Standard
29190 \begin_layout Standard
29200 \begin_layout Standard
29201 and for the answer branch
29204 \begin_layout Standard
29214 \begin_layout Standard
29224 \begin_layout Standard
29225 \begin_inset Branch Question
29228 \begin_layout Standard
29232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29260 \begin_layout Standard
29261 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29264 \begin_layout Standard
29268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29296 \begin_layout Standard
29297 Now it is possible to use the commands
29301 question{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29308 answer{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29311 to obtain conditional output.
29312 Here is an example formula where only the
29319 \begin_inset Formula
29321 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29329 \begin_layout Standard
29330 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29336 \change_inserted 5863208 1334492666
29340 \begin_layout Standard
29342 \change_inserted 5863208 1334493356
29343 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29345 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.).
29346 For this advanced usage, please study Customization manual (in particular
29348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29351 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29360 \begin_layout Section
29362 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29364 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29369 \begin_inset Index idx
29372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29381 \begin_layout Standard
29386 dialog allows you in the
29390 to set up special options for the PDF output of your document.
29391 All options there are provided by the LaTeX-package
29396 \begin_inset Index idx
29399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29400 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
29408 \begin_layout Standard
29413 will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29414 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29415 table of contents entry or on a reference and he is shown the referenced
29417 You can specify in the dialog tab
29421 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29423 The backreferences will appear in the bibliography behind the different
29424 entries, showing the number of the section, slide, or page where the entry
29428 \begin_layout Standard
29433 you can set if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of your
29434 document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
29435 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
29437 With the open bookmarks level you can specify what sectioning level should
29438 be displayed in the bookmarks when opening the PDF.
29440 \begin_inset space ~
29443 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
29444 \begin_inset space ~
29447 1 will only display the sections.
29450 \begin_layout Standard
29451 The header information in the dialog tab
29455 are saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29456 Many programs are able to extract this information to e.
29457 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29461 \begin_inset space \space{}
29464 automatically recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29465 This is very useful to sort, classify, or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29468 Automatic fill header
29470 is set, LyX tries to extract the header information from your document
29471 title and author settings.
29474 \begin_layout Standard
29477 Load in fullscreen mode
29479 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29482 \begin_layout Standard
29483 PDF properties are also used in this document.
29484 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
29490 For an explanation of them we refer you to the hyperref manual
29491 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29500 \begin_layout Section
29501 TeX Code and the LaTeX Syntax
29502 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29504 name "sec:TeX-Code"
29511 \begin_layout Subsection
29513 \begin_inset Index idx
29516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29523 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29525 name "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
29532 \begin_layout Standard
29533 As LyX uses LaTeX in the background, it supports many LaTeX commands and
29534 constructs, but not all.
29535 LaTeX contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
29536 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
29537 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
29538 is for every problem a LaTeX-package.
29539 But LyX can of course not be up to date and support all packages and their
29543 \begin_layout Standard
29544 But don't worry, you can use any LaTeX-command directly in LyX inside the
29546 A TeX Code box is created by the menu
29548 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29550 \begin_inset space ~
29555 or by the toolbar button
29568 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
29576 \begin_layout Standard
29577 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as TeX Code.
29578 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard LyX text.
29579 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
29580 using the LaTeX-command
29586 , you can write the command part
29592 in a TeX Code box before the word and the closing brace
29596 in a second TeX Code box behind the word.
29597 The word between the two TeX Code boxes is then the argument as it is in
29598 the following example:
29601 \begin_layout Standard
29602 \begin_inset Graphics
29603 filename clipart/ERT.png
29611 \begin_layout Standard
29615 \begin_layout Standard
29616 This is a line with a
29620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29643 \begin_layout Standard
29644 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29652 At the end of LaTeX-commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
29653 to let LaTeX know that the command is finished.
29661 \begin_layout Subsection
29662 Short Introduction to the LaTeX Syntax
29663 \begin_inset Argument 1
29666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29673 \begin_inset Index idx
29676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29685 name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29692 \begin_layout Standard
29693 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
29694 about the LaTeX-commands that LyX uses in the background.
29695 Because LaTeX is based on commands, you can
29696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29704 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
29705 any time if you know the right commands.
29707 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29711 \begin_inset space \space{}
29714 imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline is the
29716 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
29717 all caption labels bold.
29718 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
29720 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
29724 \begin_layout Standard
29725 Now LaTeX comes into play.
29726 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a LaTeX-package.
29727 First you have to find out which and therefore look into the LaTeX package
29729 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29738 \begin_layout Standard
29739 As result you find that the package
29744 \begin_inset Index idx
29747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29748 LaTeX-packages ! caption
29754 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
29756 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29762 \begin_layout Standard
29767 usepackage[options]{package name}
29770 \begin_layout Standard
29771 All LaTeX commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
29772 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
29773 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
29776 \begin_layout Standard
29777 In your case the package name is
29782 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
29787 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
29788 So you add the command
29791 \begin_layout Standard
29796 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
29799 \begin_layout Standard
29800 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
29804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29805 For more commands provided by the
29809 package, have a look at its documentation,
29810 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29824 \begin_layout Standard
29825 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
29827 For example if you use a
29831 class, you don't need the package
29835 , you can instead write
29838 \begin_layout Standard
29843 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
29848 \begin_layout Standard
29849 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
29850 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
29851 documentation of the document class you want to use.
29858 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
29861 \begin_layout Standard
29862 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
29863 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
29865 To insert a LaTeX-command in text, use the TeX Code box as described in
29866 the previous section.
29869 \begin_layout Standard
29870 If you want to learn more about LaTeX and its syntax, have a look at the
29872 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29874 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
29881 \begin_layout Standard
29882 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
29888 \begin_layout Standard
29892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29902 \begin_inset Note Note
29905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29906 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
29914 \begin_layout Left Header
29915 \begin_inset Argument 1
29918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29938 \begin_inset Note Note
29941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29942 defines the header line as described below
29950 \begin_layout Center Header
29951 \begin_inset Argument 1
29954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29963 \begin_layout Right Header
29964 \begin_inset Argument 1
29967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29988 \begin_layout Left Footer
29989 \begin_inset Argument 1
29992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30013 \begin_layout Center Footer
30014 \begin_inset Argument 1
30017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30028 \begin_inset Newline newline
30032 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30038 \begin_layout Right Footer
30039 \begin_inset Argument 1
30042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30064 \begin_layout Section
30065 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30066 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30068 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30073 \begin_inset Index idx
30076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30077 Document ! Header/Footer line
30083 \begin_inset Index idx
30086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30095 \begin_layout Standard
30096 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30097 to set the headings style to
30103 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30109 \begin_inset space ~
30115 As a second step add in the menu
30117 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30118 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30125 Custom Header/Footerlines
30126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30130 This module offers the following 6
30131 \begin_inset space ~
30137 \begin_layout Description
30139 \begin_inset space ~
30143 \begin_inset space ~
30147 \begin_inset space ~
30151 \begin_inset space ~
30155 \begin_inset space ~
30161 \begin_layout Description
30163 \begin_inset space ~
30167 \begin_inset space ~
30171 \begin_inset space ~
30175 \begin_inset space ~
30179 \begin_inset space ~
30185 \begin_layout Standard
30186 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30189 \begin_layout Standard
30190 Normally, headers and footers are set up in the beginning of the document.
30191 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30193 \begin_inset space ~
30197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30199 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30203 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30206 \begin_layout Standard
30207 \begin_inset Float figure
30213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30216 \begin_inset Tabular
30217 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30218 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
30219 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30220 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30221 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30223 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30241 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30252 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30270 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30281 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30285 The normal text on the page goes here.
30286 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30288 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30289 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30294 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30303 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30314 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30332 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30343 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
30355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30361 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30379 \begin_inset Caption Standard
30381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30382 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30384 name "fig:Page-layout"
30388 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
30401 \begin_layout Subsection
30405 \begin_layout Standard
30406 To define your header line, add all 3
30407 \begin_inset space ~
30411 The things you add to the styles appear on uneven pages, the things in
30412 the optional arguments on even pages.
30413 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
30415 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
30416 Defining the footer line works similar.
30419 \begin_layout Standard
30420 For the definition, you will need some LaTeX-commands that are inserted
30423 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30436 \begin_inset space ~
30444 \begin_layout Description
30447 thepage prints the current page number
30450 \begin_layout Description
30453 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
30456 \begin_layout Description
30459 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
30462 \begin_layout Description
30465 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
30466 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
30469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30473 \begin_inset Quotes prd
30476 because it usually goes in a left header.
30479 \begin_layout Description
30482 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
30483 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
30485 It is normally used in the right header.
30488 \begin_layout Subsection
30489 Default header/footer
30492 \begin_layout Standard
30493 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
30494 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
30495 footer has the page number.
30496 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
30497 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
30498 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
30501 \begin_inset space ~
30509 \begin_layout Subsection
30513 \begin_layout Standard
30514 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
30515 Some pages are different.
30516 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
30517 a new part or chapter in your book.
30518 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
30519 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
30520 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
30523 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30524 Header and footer decoration line
30527 \begin_layout Standard
30528 By default, you get a 0.4
30529 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30532 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
30533 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
30545 in the following scheme:
30548 \begin_layout Standard
30555 headrulewidth}{thickness}
30558 \begin_layout Standard
30559 Where thickness is a size in standard units like
30568 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
30569 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30575 \begin_layout Standard
30576 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of LaTeX.
30577 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
30578 \begin_inset space ~
30582 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30591 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30592 Several header/footer lines
30595 \begin_layout Standard
30596 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
30597 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
30598 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
30600 To expand the height, redefine the LaTeX length
30612 in this scheme in your document preamble:
30615 \begin_layout Standard
30622 headheight}{height}
30625 \begin_layout Standard
30626 Where height is a size in standard units.
30627 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
30628 your header/footer and preview your document as PDF.
30629 Then open the LaTeX logfile via the menu
30631 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30645 and look via the button
30648 \begin_inset space ~
30653 if you find a warning of the package
30658 \begin_inset Index idx
30661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30662 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
30668 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
30669 for your header/footer.
30672 \begin_layout Subsection
30676 \begin_layout Standard
30677 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
30678 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
30679 This example consists of the following definition:
30682 \begin_layout Description
30684 \begin_inset space ~
30693 , empty optional argument
30696 \begin_layout Description
30698 \begin_inset space ~
30701 Header empty, empty optional argument
30704 \begin_layout Description
30706 \begin_inset space ~
30715 in the optional argument
30718 \begin_layout Description
30720 \begin_inset space ~
30729 in the optional argument
30732 \begin_layout Description
30734 \begin_inset space ~
30746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30750 \begin_inset Newline newline
30754 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30761 in the optional argument
30764 \begin_layout Description
30766 \begin_inset space ~
30775 , empty optional argument
30778 \begin_layout Description
30781 headrulewidth set to 2
30782 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30788 \begin_layout Standard
30789 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
30790 For more special things like e.
30791 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30795 \begin_inset space ~
30798 thumb-indexes, see the manual of the
30803 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30812 \begin_layout Standard
30813 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
30819 \begin_layout Standard
30823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30827 pagestyle{headings}
30833 \begin_inset Note Note
30836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30837 switches back to page style with the default headings
30845 \begin_layout Section
30846 Previewing Snippets of your Document
30847 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30849 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
30854 \begin_inset Index idx
30857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30864 \begin_inset Index idx
30867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30876 \begin_layout Standard
30877 LyX allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the
30878 fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
30879 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
30882 \begin_layout Subsection
30886 \begin_layout Standard
30887 To get previews working, you need the LaTeX package
30892 \begin_inset Index idx
30895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30896 LaTeX-packages ! preview-latex
30901 (on some systems named simply
30906 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the TeX-catalogue,
30908 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30914 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
30915 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
30923 package; for LyX on Windows this program and also the LaTeX-package are
30924 automatically installed together with LyX.
30927 \begin_layout Subsection
30931 \begin_layout Standard
30932 If you would for example like to see in LyX your math formulas typeset by
30933 LaTeX, activate the option
30936 \begin_inset space ~
30943 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30949 \begin_inset space ~
30953 \begin_inset space ~
30956 feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30963 \begin_inset space ~
30976 \begin_inset space ~
30981 is the multiplication factor for the size.
30984 \begin_layout Standard
30985 Previews are generated when you load a document into LyX and when you finish
30989 \begin_layout Standard
30990 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30998 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
30999 generated by activating the option
31002 \begin_inset space ~
31008 Reopening the documents will fix such problems.
31016 \begin_layout Subsection
31017 Selected document parts
31020 \begin_layout Standard
31021 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31022 for example things that LyX cannot render like rotated parts or things
31023 that are not yet supported by LyX.
31024 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31026 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31030 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31031 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31032 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31035 \begin_layout Standard
31036 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the LaTeX command
31042 which is not yet supported by LyX.
31046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31053 is explained in section
31055 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31060 \begin_inset space ~
31070 Instead of the TeX Code boxes you want to see in LyX the final rotated
31071 boxes, for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding
31073 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31075 Here is the result:
31078 \begin_layout Standard
31079 \begin_inset Preview
31081 \begin_layout Standard
31086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31090 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31096 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31106 height_special "totalheight"
31109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31134 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31140 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31162 \begin_layout Standard
31163 Previewing works also for colors.
31164 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the LaTeX
31175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31182 is explained in section
31189 \begin_inset space ~
31202 \begin_layout Standard
31203 \begin_inset Preview
31205 \begin_layout Standard
31209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31228 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31233 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31252 \begin_layout Standard
31253 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31259 \begin_layout Standard
31260 If LyX does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31261 above and also make sure that TeX Code in the preview inset is valid and
31262 that you loaded the LaTeX packages in your document preamble that are required
31264 If LyX cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able
31265 to view your document due to LaTeX errors.
31266 So if you have to use some TeX Code and don't know if it is correct, the
31267 preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the
31271 \begin_layout Subsection
31275 \begin_layout Standard
31276 You can preview the LaTeX source of the whole document or parts of it.
31279 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31281 \begin_inset space ~
31286 and a window will be shown where you can see the LaTeX-source code.
31287 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph where the cursor is
31289 You can also select document parts in LyX's main window, then only this
31290 selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
31291 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
31292 the source view window.
31295 \begin_layout Section
31296 Advanced Find and Replace
31297 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31299 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
31304 \begin_inset Index idx
31307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31314 \begin_inset Index idx
31317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31326 \begin_layout Subsection
31330 \begin_layout Standard
31331 The advanced find and replace feature of LyX allows for searching of complex,
31332 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within LyX documents.
31333 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
31334 The key-features are:
31337 \begin_layout Itemize
31338 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
31339 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
31340 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
31344 \begin_layout Itemize
31345 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
31346 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
31347 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
31348 a section heading will only be found within section headings
31351 \begin_layout Itemize
31352 Search may be widened to a specific
31357 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31361 \begin_inset space ~
31364 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
31365 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
31372 \begin_layout Itemize
31373 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
31374 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
31375 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31379 \begin_inset space ~
31382 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
31385 \begin_layout Subsection
31389 \begin_layout Standard
31390 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
31392 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31405 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
31408 ) or the toolbar button
31411 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
31417 Advanced Find and Replace
31422 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31426 \begin_layout Standard
31431 LyX mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
31436 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
31439 arg "break-paragraph"
31443 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
31444 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
31445 Pressing repeatedly
31448 arg "break-paragraph"
31451 keeps searching forward while pressing
31455 searches backwards.
31458 \begin_layout Standard
31463 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
31473 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
31476 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31477 Searching for mathematics
31480 \begin_layout Standard
31481 Mathematical formulas may be searched for by typing them the
31486 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
31489 or also something more complex like
31490 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
31494 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
31495 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
31496 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
31497 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
31503 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31507 \begin_layout Standard
31508 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
31509 This is done by switching to the
31513 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
31518 This way, entering in the
31525 \begin_layout Itemize
31526 a plain word and searching for it would not find instances of the word occurring
31527 in emphasized or boldface.
31530 \begin_layout Itemize
31531 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
31532 instances with same face only, and within the same text style only.
31535 \begin_layout Itemize
31536 a plain word in a section heading, and searching for it, finds occurrences
31537 of if only within section headings.
31538 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
31539 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
31543 \begin_layout Itemize
31544 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
31545 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
31548 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31552 \begin_layout Standard
31553 The document segments entered in the
31557 editor can be replaced with the text segments entered in the
31565 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
31569 button or alternatively
31576 arg "break-paragraph"
31583 while the cursor is in the
31593 \begin_layout Standard
31594 You can replace with full-featured formatted LyX segments.
31595 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability may be (just to mention
31599 \begin_layout Itemize
31600 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
31601 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
31602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31609 with its typewriter version
31610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31624 \begin_layout Itemize
31625 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
31627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31631 \begin_inset Formula $R$
31635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31643 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
31647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31650 (you may want to enable the
31658 options and disable the
31666 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
31667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31674 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
31675 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
31679 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$
31682 , or occurrences of
31683 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
31687 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
31693 \begin_layout Subsection
31697 \begin_layout Standard
31698 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
31702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31703 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
31705 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31707 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
31716 You can search for regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
31722 This is done via the menu
31724 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31725 Insert Regular Expression
31727 while the cursor is in the
31732 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
31733 expression matching rules
31737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31738 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed LyX
31740 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31744 \begin_inset space ~
31747 when matching LaTeX code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed
31748 to match expressions.
31753 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
31754 same text in the document.
31755 It is allowed to cut and paste regexp-mode insets as usual.
31756 Examples of using such a feature may be:
31759 \begin_layout Enumerate
31760 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
31765 editor the fraction
31766 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
31770 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
31773 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
31774 fractions with the given denominator.
31777 \begin_layout Enumerate
31778 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
31790 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
31795 regular expression and adding for it an emphasized or bold face, finds
31796 all emphasized and bold face text, respectively.
31798 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
31801 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
31802 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
31805 \begin_layout Standard
31806 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
31807 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
31808 \begin_inset Formula $()$
31811 , and referring back to them through
31812 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
31816 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
31820 For example, try searching for the regexp
31821 \begin_inset Newline newline
31824 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
31827 \begin_inset Newline newline
31830 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
31833 \begin_layout Standard
31834 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
31837 \begin_layout Standard
31838 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31847 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
31848 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
31849 sub-expressions is absolute.
31851 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31855 \begin_inset space ~
31859 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
31862 always refers to the first occurrence of
31863 \begin_inset Formula $()$
31866 in all entered regexps.
31874 \begin_layout Section
31876 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31878 name "sec:Spellchecking"
31883 \begin_inset Index idx
31886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31895 \begin_layout Standard
31896 LyX has a built-in spell checker.
31899 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31906 or the toolbar button
31909 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
31912 starts the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
31913 beginning of the currently selected text.
31914 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
31915 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
31916 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
31917 scrolled so that it is visible.
31918 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
31919 n, if any could be found.
31920 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
31924 field, double-click directly invokes the replacement.
31925 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
31928 \begin_layout Standard
31929 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
31932 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31936 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
31937 a different one at the top of the dialog.
31938 LyX can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
31939 This works if you have marked the different languages appropriately and
31940 have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
31941 LyX automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
31944 \begin_layout Standard
31945 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here:
31946 \begin_inset Newline newline
31950 \begin_inset Flex URL
31953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31955 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
31961 \begin_inset Newline newline
31965 \begin_inset space ~
31968 files for each language.
31969 To install a dictionary, copy the 2
31970 \begin_inset space ~
31973 files into LyX's installation subfolder
31984 \begin_layout Subsection
31988 \begin_layout Standard
31989 In LyX's preferences dialog under
31992 \begin_inset space ~
31995 Setting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31998 you can set the following things:
32001 \begin_layout Description
32003 \begin_inset space ~
32006 engine Select the library LyX should use for spell checking.
32007 Depending on your platform,
32021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32022 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32023 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32038 \begin_layout Description
32040 \begin_inset space ~
32043 language If this field is not empty, LyX will always use the given language
32044 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32047 \begin_layout Description
32049 \begin_inset space ~
32052 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32054 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32058 \begin_inset space \space{}
32062 This should normally not be needed.
32065 \begin_layout Description
32067 \begin_inset space ~
32071 \begin_inset space ~
32074 words Prevent the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32086 \begin_layout Description
32088 \begin_inset space ~
32091 continuously Check the spelling of your document as you type it.
32092 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32093 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32094 appear in the context menu.
32095 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32099 \begin_layout Description
32101 \begin_inset space ~
32105 \begin_inset space ~
32109 \begin_inset space ~
32112 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document contents is checked
32116 \begin_layout Section
32118 \begin_inset Index idx
32121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32128 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32130 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32137 \begin_layout Standard
32138 LyX provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32139 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32149 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32151 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32160 thesaurus library, which is included in LyX).
32161 Therefore, LyX can directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries, which
32162 are available for many languages.
32165 \begin_layout Standard
32166 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32170 \begin_layout Subsection
32171 Setting up the thesaurus
32174 \begin_layout Standard
32182 OpenOffice thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
32187 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
32192 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
32194 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32198 \begin_inset space ~
32206 For instance, the US English files are named:
32209 \begin_layout Itemize
32213 \begin_layout Itemize
32217 \begin_layout Standard
32218 If you have LibreOffice or OpenOffice and its thesaurus installed on a Linux
32219 system, these files should be already on your system.
32220 On Windows you can choose in LyX's installer wich dictionaries should be
32224 \begin_layout Standard
32225 All thesaurus dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here:
32226 \begin_inset Newline newline
32230 \begin_inset Flex URL
32233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32235 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
32241 \begin_inset Newline newline
32244 To install a dictionary, copy the 2
32245 \begin_inset space ~
32248 files into LyX's installation subfolder
32259 \begin_layout Subsection
32260 Using the thesaurus
32263 \begin_layout Standard
32264 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
32266 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32269 or the toolbar button
32272 arg "thesaurus-entry"
32275 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
32277 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
32279 The proposals are grouped into categories.
32280 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
32281 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
32290 ), related terms (such as
32293 \begin_inset space ~
32302 ), compounds (such as
32305 \begin_inset space ~
32314 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
32323 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
32326 \begin_layout Standard
32327 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
32328 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
32332 \begin_layout Standard
32333 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
32334 the dictionary, such as the above
32338 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
32339 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32343 \begin_inset space \space{}
32346 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
32347 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
32348 For example looking up the word form
32349 \change_deleted 2090807402 1338765333
32360 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
32366 \change_inserted 2090807402 1338765282
32367 The thesuarus is able to resolve inflected forms (so if you enter
32371 , it will resolve it to the form
32375 which is in the dictionary).
32376 However, this may not always work.
32377 So if you do not get any results for inflected forms, try the lemma form.
32380 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant parts of such word (e.
32381 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32385 \begin_inset space \space{}
32396 s), then you get proposals without adjusting the query in the dialog, and
32397 also the replacement will probably be correct (as only the highlighted
32398 part will be replaced, thus the ending remains).
32401 \begin_layout Section
32403 \begin_inset Index idx
32406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32413 \begin_inset Index idx
32416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32417 Document ! Change Tracking
32423 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32425 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
32432 \begin_layout Standard
32433 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
32434 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
32435 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
32436 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
32438 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32440 \begin_inset space ~
32443 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32445 \begin_inset space ~
32453 \begin_layout Standard
32454 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
32468 The color depends on the author that made the change.
32469 You can change the color in LyX's preferences dialog under
32472 \begin_inset space ~
32476 \begin_inset space ~
32486 \begin_inset Index idx
32489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32490 Color ! Change tracking
32495 The author and the date of the change are shown in LyX's status bar when
32496 the cursor is in changed text.
32497 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
32500 arg "changes-merge"
32506 \begin_layout Standard
32507 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in LyX:
32508 \begin_inset Index idx
32511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32520 \begin_layout Standard
32521 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32527 \begin_layout Standard
32528 \begin_inset Graphics
32529 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
32537 \begin_layout Standard
32538 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32544 \begin_layout Standard
32545 The review toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
32549 \begin_layout Standard
32550 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32556 \begin_layout Standard
32557 \begin_inset Tabular
32558 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
32559 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
32560 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
32561 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
32562 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32571 arg "changes-track"
32579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32585 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32587 \begin_inset space ~
32590 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32592 \begin_inset space ~
32601 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32610 arg "changes-output"
32618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32624 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32626 \begin_inset space ~
32629 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32631 \begin_inset space ~
32635 \begin_inset space ~
32639 \begin_inset space ~
32648 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32669 Jumps to the next change
32675 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32684 arg "change-accept"
32692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32698 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32700 \begin_inset space ~
32703 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32705 \begin_inset space ~
32714 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32723 arg "change-reject"
32731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32737 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32739 \begin_inset space ~
32742 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32744 \begin_inset space ~
32753 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32762 arg "changes-merge"
32770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32776 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32778 \begin_inset space ~
32781 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32783 \begin_inset space ~
32792 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32801 arg "all-changes-accept"
32809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32815 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32817 \begin_inset space ~
32820 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32822 \begin_inset space ~
32826 \begin_inset space ~
32835 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32844 arg "all-changes-reject"
32852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32858 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32860 \begin_inset space ~
32863 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32865 \begin_inset space ~
32869 \begin_inset space ~
32878 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32901 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32902 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32904 \begin_inset space ~
32913 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
32914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
32933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32936 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32938 \begin_inset space ~
32954 \begin_layout Standard
32955 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
32961 \begin_layout Standard
32962 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
32963 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
32964 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
32965 the next change after the current cursor position.
32966 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
32967 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
32968 step to the next change.
32969 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
32972 \begin_layout Standard
32973 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
32974 to describe a change.
32977 \begin_layout Standard
32978 To show the made changes in the output you need the LaTeX package
32983 \begin_inset Index idx
32986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32987 LaTeX-packages ! dvipost
32993 You will find it in the TeX Catalogue,
32994 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33000 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
33003 \begin_layout Section
33004 Comparison of Documents
33005 \begin_inset Index idx
33008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33009 Comparison of documents
33017 \begin_layout Standard
33018 You can compare two different LyX files via the menu
33020 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33024 The comparison result is a LyX file with change tracking enabled showing
33026 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document LyX should
33027 take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33031 \begin_inset space ~
33035 \begin_inset space ~
33039 \begin_inset space ~
33048 \begin_inset space ~
33052 \begin_inset space ~
33056 \begin_inset space ~
33060 \begin_inset space ~
33064 \begin_inset space ~
33068 \begin_inset space ~
33073 enables the change tracking option
33076 \begin_inset space ~
33080 \begin_inset space ~
33084 \begin_inset space ~
33089 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
33092 \begin_layout Section
33093 International Support
33094 \begin_inset Index idx
33097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33098 International support
33106 \begin_layout Standard
33107 This section describes how to use LyX with any language you want.
33108 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
33109 up LyX to use them:
33110 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33112 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
33119 \begin_layout Standard
33120 Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section
33121 \begin_inset space ~
33125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33127 reference "sub:Special-Character"
33134 \begin_layout Subsection
33136 \begin_inset Index idx
33139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33146 \begin_inset Index idx
33149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33150 Document ! Settings
33156 \begin_inset Index idx
33159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33160 Document ! Language
33168 \begin_layout Standard
33171 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33172 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33175 dialog lets you set
33177 the language, the quote style and character encoding
33182 \begin_layout Standard
33187 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for LaTeX export.
33191 \begin_inset space ~
33196 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
33197 For details about the different encoding options see section
33198 \begin_inset space ~
33202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33204 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
33211 \begin_layout Subsection
33212 Keyboard mapping configuration
33213 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33215 name "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
33222 \begin_layout Standard
33223 If you have for example a U.
33224 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33227 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
33228 can use an alternate keymap.
33229 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure LyX to
33230 use an Italian keymap.
33233 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33234 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33235 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33238 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
33239 \begin_inset space ~
33243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33245 reference "sub:Keyboard-Map"
33250 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
33251 which one you want to use.
33254 \begin_layout Standard
33255 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
33256 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
33257 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
33258 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33261 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
33262 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
33263 one to support the characters you want.
33264 This and many other customizations are explained in the
33271 \begin_layout Chapter
33274 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33276 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
33283 \begin_layout Standard
33284 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
33285 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
33286 topic inside the user's guide.
33289 \begin_layout Section
33291 \begin_inset Index idx
33294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33303 \begin_layout Standard
33308 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
33311 \begin_layout Subsection
33315 \begin_layout Standard
33316 Creates a new document.
33319 \begin_layout Subsection
33323 \begin_layout Standard
33324 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
33325 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
33326 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
33329 \begin_layout Subsection
33333 \begin_layout Standard
33337 \begin_layout Subsection
33341 \begin_layout Standard
33342 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
33343 Click there on a file to open it.
33346 \begin_layout Subsection
33350 \begin_layout Standard
33351 Closes the current document.
33354 \begin_layout Subsection
33358 \begin_layout Standard
33359 Closes all opened documents.
33362 \begin_layout Subsection
33366 \begin_layout Standard
33367 Saves the actual document.
33370 \begin_layout Subsection
33374 \begin_layout Standard
33375 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
33378 \begin_layout Subsection
33382 \begin_layout Standard
33383 Saves all opened documents.
33386 \begin_layout Subsection
33390 \begin_layout Standard
33391 Reloads the actual document from disk.
33394 \begin_layout Subsection
33398 \begin_layout Standard
33399 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
33400 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
33401 It is described in the section
33403 Version Control in LyX
33407 Additional Features
33412 \begin_layout Subsection
33416 \begin_layout Standard
33417 Here you can import files from older LyX-versions, HTML-files, LaTeX-files,
33418 NoWeb-files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files
33420 The files will be imported as a new LyX-document.
33423 \begin_layout Standard
33424 When using the menu entry
33427 \begin_inset space ~
33432 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
33436 \begin_inset space ~
33440 \begin_inset space ~
33445 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
33446 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
33449 \begin_layout Subsection
33451 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33460 \begin_layout Standard
33461 You can export your document to various file formats.
33462 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your LyX-file.
33463 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
33464 They depend on the programs found by LyX during its configuration.
33467 \begin_layout Standard
33468 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
33470 \begin_inset space ~
33474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33476 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
33483 \begin_layout Description
33489 \begin_inset space ~
33496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33503 yX format of the special LyX
33504 \begin_inset space ~
33507 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
33508 \begin_inset Newline newline
33511 Since LyX 1.5.0 CJK support is fully integrated into LyX.
33514 \begin_layout Description
33515 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
33521 \begin_layout Description
33523 \begin_inset space ~
33526 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
33532 \begin_layout Description
33533 DraftDVI LaTeX's native DVI-format.
33534 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
33535 files paths or file names in your document.
33536 LyX use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
33543 \begin_layout Description
33544 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
33545 in files paths or file names
33548 \begin_layout Description
33550 \begin_inset space ~
33557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33564 eX) DVI-format using the program
33568 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-TeX fonts;
33571 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33579 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
33587 \begin_layout Description
33589 \begin_inset space ~
33592 Dot text file with code in the programming language
33596 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
33601 \begin_layout Description
33602 HTML HTML-format (the HTML-converter is a third-party product and may not
33606 \begin_layout Description
33608 \begin_inset space ~
33612 \begin_inset space ~
33615 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
33619 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
33627 \begin_layout Description
33634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33642 \begin_inset space ~
33653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33666 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
33671 \begin_layout Description
33678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33686 \begin_inset space ~
33691 text file with the LaTeX source, additionally all images used in the document
33692 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
33696 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
33699 \begin_layout Description
33706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33714 \begin_inset space ~
33719 text file with the LaTeX source code, additionally all images used in the
33720 document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
33728 \begin_layout Description
33735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33743 \begin_inset space ~
33754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33767 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
33772 \begin_layout Description
33774 \begin_inset space ~
33778 \begin_inset space ~
33787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33796 TeX) text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the syntax of the
33797 music notation software
33802 \begin_layout Description
33809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33819 \begin_inset space ~
33823 \begin_inset space ~
33826 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
33827 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
33828 to compile it (images, child documents, BibTeX files, etc.)
33831 \begin_layout Description
33838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33848 \begin_inset space ~
33851 z.y.x LyX-Document in a format readable by the LyX versions z.y.x (
33852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33867 represent the version number)
33870 \begin_layout Description
33877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33886 yXHTML HTML-format using LyX's internal XHTML engine
33889 \begin_layout Description
33890 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
33895 \begin_layout Description
33896 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
33898 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
33901 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
33905 \begin_layout Description
33909 \begin_inset space ~
33914 PDF-format using the program
33918 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
33921 \begin_layout Description
33925 \begin_inset space ~
33932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33941 PDF-format using the program
33945 , produces PDF-files directly
33948 \begin_layout Description
33952 \begin_inset space ~
33957 PDF-format using the program
33961 , produces PDF-files directly
33964 \begin_layout Description
33968 \begin_inset space ~
33973 PDF-format using the program
33977 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
33980 \begin_layout Description
33984 \begin_inset space ~
33991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34000 PDF-format using the program
34004 , produces PDF-files directly
34007 \begin_layout Description
34011 \begin_inset space ~
34019 \begin_layout Description
34023 \begin_inset space ~
34027 \begin_inset space ~
34032 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
34033 and then exported as text using the program
34038 \begin_layout Description
34043 PostScript format using the program
34048 \begin_layout Description
34049 Sweave text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the statistical
34050 programming language
34063 it is possible to use
34070 \begin_layout Standard
34071 If one of the menu entries
34078 \begin_inset space ~
34087 is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
34088 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
34089 \begin_inset space ~
34093 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34095 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
34100 \begin_inset Index idx
34103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34104 Reconfiguration of LyX
34112 \begin_layout Subsection
34116 \begin_layout Standard
34117 With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript
34118 format or send it to a printer.
34119 The printer will also use the document in PostScript format.
34120 The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by LyX using the
34126 For more information have a look at section
34127 \begin_inset space ~
34131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34133 reference "sub:Printing-the-File"
34140 \begin_layout Subsection
34144 \begin_layout Standard
34145 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
34146 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to LyX's PATH
34147 prefix, see section
34148 \begin_inset space ~
34152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34154 reference "sec:Paths"
34159 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
34168 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
34169 The format can be changed in LyX's preferences as described in section
34170 \begin_inset space ~
34174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34176 reference "sub:Converters"
34183 \begin_layout Subsection
34184 New and Close Window
34187 \begin_layout Standard
34188 Opens or closes a new instance of LyX.
34191 \begin_layout Subsection
34195 \begin_layout Standard
34196 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
34199 \begin_layout Section
34201 \begin_inset Index idx
34204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34213 \begin_layout Subsection
34217 \begin_layout Standard
34218 Described in section
34219 \begin_inset space ~
34223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34225 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
34232 \begin_layout Subsection
34233 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
34236 \begin_layout Standard
34237 Described in section
34238 \begin_inset space ~
34242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34244 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34251 \begin_layout Subsection
34255 \begin_layout Standard
34256 Selects the content of the inset where the cursor is currently in.
34257 If the cursor is outside of an inset, the whole document will be selected.
34260 \begin_layout Subsection
34264 \begin_layout Standard
34265 Selects the whole document.
34268 \begin_layout Subsection
34269 Find & Replace (Quick)
34272 \begin_layout Standard
34273 Described in section
34274 \begin_inset space ~
34278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34280 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
34287 \begin_layout Subsection
34288 Find & Replace (Advanced)
34291 \begin_layout Standard
34292 Described in section
34293 \begin_inset space ~
34297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34299 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34306 \begin_layout Subsection
34307 Move Paragraph Up/Down
34310 \begin_layout Standard
34311 This shifts the paragraph where the cursor is currently in one paragraph
34315 \begin_layout Subsection
34319 \begin_layout Standard
34320 Described in section
34321 \begin_inset space ~
34325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34327 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
34334 \begin_layout Subsection
34336 \begin_inset Index idx
34339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34340 Paragraph ! Settings
34348 \begin_layout Standard
34349 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
34350 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
34354 \begin_layout Standard
34355 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
34356 have chosen to separate paragraphs with indents in the
34358 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34364 \begin_inset space ~
34372 \begin_layout Subsection
34373 Table Settings and Math
34376 \begin_layout Standard
34377 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
34379 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
34380 The properties of tables are described in section
34381 \begin_inset space ~
34385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34387 reference "sec:Tables"
34391 , the properties of formulas in chapter
34392 \begin_inset space ~
34396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34398 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
34405 \begin_layout Subsection
34406 Increase / Decrease List Depth
34409 \begin_layout Standard
34410 These menu entries are only active if the cursor is in an environment that
34412 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
34413 \begin_inset space ~
34417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34419 reference "sec:Nesting"
34424 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34426 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
34433 \begin_layout Section
34435 \begin_inset Index idx
34438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34447 \begin_layout Standard
34448 At the bottom of the
34452 menu the opened documents are listed.
34455 \begin_layout Subsection
34456 Open/Close all Insets
34459 \begin_layout Standard
34460 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
34463 \begin_layout Subsection
34464 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
34467 \begin_layout Standard
34468 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
34471 \begin_layout Standard
34472 Math macros are described in the
34479 \begin_layout Subsection
34483 \begin_layout Standard
34484 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
34486 \begin_inset space ~
34490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34492 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34499 \begin_layout Subsection
34503 \begin_layout Standard
34504 Opens a window showing console messages.
34505 This is useful for debugging LyX (i.
34506 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34509 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
34510 while LaTeX is processing the document.
34513 \begin_layout Subsection
34517 \begin_layout Standard
34518 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
34519 default output format either in the preferences (see sec.
34520 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34526 reference "sec:File-Formats"
34530 ) or in the document settings (see sec.
34531 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34535 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34537 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
34541 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
34542 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences, see section
34543 \begin_inset space ~
34547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34549 reference "sec:File-Formats"
34554 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
34555 The default output format is
34558 \begin_inset space ~
34566 \begin_layout Subsection
34567 View (Other Formats)
34570 \begin_layout Standard
34571 With this submenu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
34572 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
34573 actual document with an external program.
34574 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
34575 the LaTeX programs that are found while LyX was configured.
34576 All possible formats are listed in section
34577 \begin_inset space ~
34581 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34583 reference "sub:Export"
34588 You should at least see the menu entry
34593 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your LaTeX installation.
34594 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
34595 \begin_inset space ~
34599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34601 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
34606 \begin_inset Index idx
34609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34610 Reconfiguration of LyX
34618 \begin_layout Standard
34619 Invoking a menu will start a viewer program.
34620 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences, see section
34621 \begin_inset space ~
34625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34627 reference "sec:File-Formats"
34632 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
34635 \begin_layout Subsection
34639 \begin_layout Standard
34640 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
34641 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
34644 \begin_layout Subsection
34645 Update (Other Formats)
34648 \begin_layout Standard
34649 With this submenu you can update the view of alternative output formats
34650 of your document without opening a new viewer window.
34653 \begin_layout Subsection
34654 View Master Document
34657 \begin_layout Standard
34658 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
34660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34674 \begin_inset space ~
34679 manual for more information on this topic).
34680 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
34681 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
34686 generates the output of the whole book, while
34690 will just output the chapter alone.
34693 \begin_layout Standard
34694 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
34695 in the preferences (see sec.
34696 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34702 reference "sec:File-Formats"
34706 ) or in the document settings (see sec.
34707 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34713 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
34720 \begin_layout Subsection
34721 Update Master Document
34724 \begin_layout Standard
34725 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
34727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34741 \begin_inset space ~
34746 manual for more information on this topic).
34747 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
34748 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
34751 \begin_layout Standard
34752 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
34753 in the preferences (see sec.
34754 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34760 reference "sec:File-Formats"
34764 ) or in the document settings (see sec.
34765 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34771 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
34778 \begin_layout Subsection
34782 \begin_layout Standard
34783 This will split LyX's main window vertically or horizontally.
34784 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
34785 to view the same document, but at different positions.
34786 You can even split the main window several times to view for example 3
34787 or more documents at the same time.
34788 To return to an unsplit view, use the menu
34795 \begin_layout Subsection
34799 \begin_layout Standard
34800 Closes a split view.
34803 \begin_layout Subsection
34807 \begin_layout Standard
34808 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
34809 so that you will see nothing but your text.
34810 It furthermore displays LyX's main window fullscreen.
34811 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
34812 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
34815 \begin_layout Subsection
34817 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34819 name "sub:Toolbars"
34824 \begin_inset Index idx
34827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34836 \begin_layout Standard
34837 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
34838 All toolbars and the
34841 \begin_inset space ~
34846 can be turned on and off.
34851 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
34863 \begin_inset space ~
34871 \begin_inset space ~
34880 toolbars can be additionally set to the state
34884 that is denoted in the menu with the suffix
34891 \begin_layout Standard
34896 state the toolbar is permanently shown, in the
34900 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
34901 or when a certain feature is enabled.
34902 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
34903 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
34904 is inside a formula or table, respectively.
34907 \begin_layout Standard
34908 LyX's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
34909 \begin_inset space ~
34913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34915 reference "sec:Toolbars"
34922 \begin_layout Section
34924 \begin_inset Index idx
34927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34936 \begin_layout Subsection
34940 \begin_layout Standard
34941 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
34942 \begin_inset space ~
34946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34948 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
34959 \begin_layout Subsection
34961 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34963 name "sub:Special-Character"
34970 \begin_layout Standard
34971 Here you can insert the following characters:
34974 \begin_layout Description
34975 Symbols Inserts any character that can be output by your LaTeX system.
34976 Therefore the number of character categories in this dialog and the available
34977 characters depend on the LaTeX-packages you have installed.
34978 \begin_inset Newline newline
34982 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34990 Not all characters will be visible in the
34994 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
34996 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35002 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
35006 ) can display every character.
35014 \begin_layout Description
35015 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar \ldots{}
35019 \begin_layout Description
35021 \begin_inset space ~
35025 \begin_inset space ~
35028 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence dot as described in section
35029 \begin_inset space ~
35033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35035 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
35042 \begin_layout Description
35044 \begin_inset space ~
35047 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote type you selected in the
35050 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35060 \begin_layout Description
35062 \begin_inset space ~
35066 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809482
35068 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809484
35072 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809487
35074 \begin_inset Quotes ers
35078 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809513
35079 in the quotation marks style selected in the
35081 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35093 \begin_layout Description
35095 \begin_inset space ~
35098 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash-
35102 \begin_layout Description
35104 \begin_inset space ~
35107 Slash Inserts a slash where also a line break can occur: \SpecialChar \slash{}
35111 \begin_layout Description
35113 \begin_inset space ~
35116 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator
35120 \begin_layout Description
35122 \begin_inset space ~
35126 \begin_inset Index idx
35129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35136 \begin_inset Index idx
35139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35140 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35146 \change_deleted -712698321 1345808954
35147 Creates a formula with a so called tipa inset
35148 \change_inserted -712698321 1345808969
35149 Inserts a box where
35150 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809001
35155 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809047
35156 commands to create IPA phonetic
35159 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809189
35160 from the International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which
35161 provides a large set of these symbols
35165 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809068
35167 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809068
35171 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809224
35172 with traditional LaTeX
35174 you must have the LaTeX-package
35179 \begin_inset Index idx
35182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35183 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
35189 \begin_inset Newline newline
35193 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809282
35195 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809283
35198 ore information about this feature
35199 \change_deleted -712698321 1345809286
35200 we refer you to the documentation of
35203 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35211 and this Wiki-page:
35212 \begin_inset Newline newline
35216 \begin_inset Flex URL
35219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35221 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/LinguistLyX
35227 \change_inserted -712698321 1345809397
35228 can be found in the Linguistics manual (
35230 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35231 Specific Manuals\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35239 \begin_layout Subsection
35243 \begin_layout Standard
35244 Here you can insert the following format constructs:
35247 \begin_layout Description
35248 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
35249 \begin_inset script superscript
35251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35260 \begin_layout Description
35261 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
35262 \begin_inset script subscript
35264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35273 \begin_layout Description
35275 \begin_inset space ~
35278 Space Inserts a protected space that is described in section
35279 \begin_inset space ~
35283 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35285 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
35292 \begin_layout Description
35294 \begin_inset space ~
35297 Space Inserts an inter-word space that is described in section
35298 \begin_inset space ~
35302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35304 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
35311 \begin_layout Description
35313 \begin_inset space ~
35316 Space Inserts a thin space that is described in section
35317 \begin_inset space ~
35321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35323 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
35330 \begin_layout Description
35332 \begin_inset space ~
35335 Space Inserts horizontal space, see section
35336 \begin_inset space ~
35340 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35342 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
35349 \begin_layout Description
35351 \begin_inset space ~
35354 Line Inserts a horizontal line, see section
35355 \begin_inset space ~
35359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35361 reference "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
35368 \begin_layout Description
35370 \begin_inset space ~
35373 Space Inserts vertical space, see section
35374 \begin_inset space ~
35378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35380 reference "sub:Vertical-Space"
35387 \begin_layout Description
35388 Phantom Inserts Phantom space, see section
35389 \begin_inset space ~
35393 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35395 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
35402 \begin_layout Description
35404 \begin_inset space ~
35407 Point Inserts a hyphenation point, see section
35408 \begin_inset space ~
35412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35414 reference "sub:Hyphenation"
35421 \begin_layout Description
35423 \begin_inset space ~
35426 Break Inserts a ligature break, see section
35427 \begin_inset space ~
35431 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35433 reference "sub:Ligatures"
35440 \begin_layout Description
35442 \begin_inset space ~
35446 \begin_inset space ~
35449 Break Inserts a forced line break, see section
35450 \begin_inset space ~
35454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35456 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35463 \begin_layout Description
35465 \begin_inset space ~
35468 Break Inserts a forced line break that furthermore stretches the broken
35469 text line to the page border, see section
35470 \begin_inset space ~
35474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35476 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
35483 \begin_layout Description
35485 \begin_inset space ~
35488 Page Inserts a forced page break, described in section
35489 \begin_inset space ~
35493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35495 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
35502 \begin_layout Description
35504 \begin_inset space ~
35507 Break Inserts a forced page break that furthermore stretches the broken
35508 text page to the page border, described in section
35509 \begin_inset space ~
35513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35515 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
35522 \begin_layout Description
35524 \begin_inset space ~
35527 Page Inserts a clear page break, described in section
35528 \begin_inset space ~
35532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35534 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
35541 \begin_layout Description
35543 \begin_inset space ~
35547 \begin_inset space ~
35550 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break, described in section
35551 \begin_inset space ~
35555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35557 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
35564 \begin_layout Subsection
35568 \begin_layout Standard
35569 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
35570 The table of contents, the algorithm, figures and tables list are described
35572 \begin_inset space ~
35576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35578 reference "sec:toc"
35583 The index list is described in section
35584 \begin_inset space ~
35588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35590 reference "sec:Index"
35594 , the nomenclature in section
35595 \begin_inset space ~
35599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35601 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
35605 and the BibTeX bibliography in section
35606 \begin_inset space ~
35610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35612 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
35619 \begin_layout Subsection
35623 \begin_layout Standard
35624 To insert floats, described in section
35625 \begin_inset space ~
35629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35631 reference "sec:Floats"
35638 \begin_layout Subsection
35642 \begin_layout Standard
35643 To insert notes, described in section
35644 \begin_inset space ~
35648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35650 reference "sec:Notes"
35657 \begin_layout Subsection
35661 \begin_layout Standard
35662 Inserts branch insets as described in section
35663 \begin_inset space ~
35667 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35669 reference "sec:Branches"
35676 \begin_layout Subsection
35680 \begin_layout Standard
35681 Inserts document class-specific insets.
35682 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
35684 An example is the document class
35685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35692 with three custom insets.
35695 Flex insets and InsetLayout
35701 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
35704 \begin_layout Subsection
35706 \begin_inset Index idx
35709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35718 \begin_layout Standard
35719 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
35721 How you can do this is explained in detail in the chapter
35728 \begin_inset space ~
35736 \begin_layout Subsection
35738 \begin_inset Index idx
35741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35750 \begin_layout Standard
35751 Inserts a minipage box that is described section
35752 \begin_inset space ~
35756 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35758 reference "sec:Minipages"
35763 All box types supported by LyX are explained in detail in the chapter
35770 \begin_inset space ~
35778 \begin_layout Subsection
35782 \begin_layout Standard
35783 Inserts a citation as described in section
35784 \begin_inset space ~
35788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35790 reference "sec:Bibliography"
35797 \begin_layout Subsection
35801 \begin_layout Standard
35802 Inserts a cross-reference as described in section
35803 \begin_inset space ~
35807 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35809 reference "sec:Cross-References"
35816 \begin_layout Subsection
35820 \begin_layout Standard
35821 Inserts a label as described in section
35822 \begin_inset space ~
35826 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35828 reference "sec:Cross-References"
35835 \begin_layout Subsection
35837 \begin_inset Index idx
35840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35847 \begin_inset Index idx
35850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35851 Longtables ! Caption
35859 \begin_layout Standard
35860 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
35861 Floats are described in section
35862 \begin_inset space ~
35866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35868 reference "sec:Floats"
35872 , captions in longtables are described in the section
35879 \begin_inset space ~
35887 \begin_layout Subsection
35891 \begin_layout Standard
35892 Inserts an index entry as described in section
35893 \begin_inset space ~
35897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35899 reference "sec:Index"
35906 \begin_layout Subsection
35910 \begin_layout Standard
35911 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
35912 \begin_inset space ~
35916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35918 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
35925 \begin_layout Subsection
35929 \begin_layout Standard
35931 Tables are described in section
35932 \begin_inset space ~
35936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35938 reference "sec:Tables"
35945 \begin_layout Subsection
35949 \begin_layout Standard
35951 Graphics are described in section
35952 \begin_inset space ~
35956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35958 reference "sec:Graphics"
35965 \begin_layout Subsection
35969 \begin_layout Standard
35970 Inserts a URL as described in section
35971 \begin_inset space ~
35975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35977 reference "sub:URLs"
35984 \begin_layout Subsection
35988 \begin_layout Standard
35989 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
35990 \begin_inset space ~
35994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35996 reference "sub:Hyperlinks"
36003 \begin_layout Subsection
36007 \begin_layout Standard
36008 Inserts a footnote, see section
36009 \begin_inset space ~
36013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36015 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36022 \begin_layout Subsection
36026 \begin_layout Standard
36027 Inserts a marginal note, see section
36028 \begin_inset space ~
36032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36034 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36041 \begin_layout Subsection
36045 \begin_layout Standard
36046 Inserts a short title, see section
36047 \begin_inset space ~
36051 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36053 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36060 \begin_layout Subsection
36064 \begin_layout Standard
36065 Inserts a TeX Code box, see section
36066 \begin_inset space ~
36070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36072 reference "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36079 \begin_layout Subsection
36081 \begin_inset Index idx
36084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36093 \begin_layout Standard
36094 Inserts a program listings box.
36095 Program listings are explained in the chapter
36097 Program Code Listings
36102 \begin_inset space ~
36110 \begin_layout Subsection
36114 \begin_layout Standard
36115 Inserts the actual date.
36116 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
36118 LyX offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
36126 \begin_inset space ~
36134 \begin_layout Subsection
36138 \begin_layout Standard
36139 Inserts a preview inset, see section
36140 \begin_inset space ~
36144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36146 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36153 \begin_layout Section
36155 \begin_inset Index idx
36158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36167 \begin_layout Standard
36168 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
36169 \begin_inset space ~
36172 of the current document.
36173 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
36176 \begin_layout Subsection
36180 \begin_layout Standard
36181 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
36182 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
36184 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36188 \begin_inset space \space{}
36192 \begin_inset space ~
36196 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
36197 \begin_inset space ~
36200 2.5 and use the submenu
36203 \begin_inset space ~
36207 \begin_inset space ~
36214 \begin_inset space ~
36220 \begin_inset space ~
36224 \begin_inset space ~
36230 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
36234 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
36240 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
36246 \begin_layout Standard
36247 You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
36248 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
36251 \begin_layout Subsection
36252 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
36255 \begin_layout Standard
36256 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference following the current
36260 \begin_layout Subsection
36264 \begin_layout Standard
36265 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
36266 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
36267 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
36271 \begin_inset space ~
36275 \begin_inset space ~
36283 \begin_layout Subsection
36287 \begin_layout Standard
36288 This feature allows you to directly jump to the corresponding text part
36289 in the output, see section
36292 \begin_inset space ~
36300 \begin_inset space ~
36305 manual for a detailed description.
36308 \begin_layout Section
36310 \begin_inset Index idx
36313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36322 \begin_layout Subsection
36326 \begin_layout Standard
36327 Change Tracking is described in section
36328 \begin_inset space ~
36332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36334 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
36341 \begin_layout Subsection
36346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36356 \begin_layout Standard
36357 After running LaTeX by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be
36359 It shows the logfile of the used LaTeX-program.
36362 \begin_layout Standard
36363 Here you can see how LaTeX works in the background.
36368 will find in it reasons for LaTeX-errors.
36371 \begin_layout Subsection
36375 \begin_layout Standard
36376 Opens the TOC/Outline window as described in section
36377 \begin_inset space ~
36381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36383 reference "sec:Navigating"
36388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36390 reference "sub:Table-of-Contents"
36397 \begin_layout Subsection
36398 Start Appendix Here
36401 \begin_layout Standard
36402 This menu will start the appendix of the document at the current cursor
36403 position as described in section
36404 \begin_inset space ~
36408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36410 reference "sec:Appendices"
36417 \begin_layout Subsection
36421 \begin_layout Standard
36422 Un/compresses the current document.
36425 \begin_layout Subsection
36429 \begin_layout Standard
36430 The document settings are described in appendix
36431 \begin_inset space ~
36435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36437 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
36444 \begin_layout Section
36446 \begin_inset Index idx
36449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36458 \begin_layout Subsection
36462 \begin_layout Standard
36463 Spell checking is explained in section
36464 \begin_inset space ~
36468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36470 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
36477 \begin_layout Subsection
36481 \begin_layout Standard
36482 The thesaurus is described in section
36483 \begin_inset space ~
36487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36489 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
36496 \begin_layout Subsection
36498 \begin_inset Index idx
36501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36508 \begin_inset Index idx
36511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36520 \begin_layout Standard
36521 Counts the words and characters in the actual document or the highlighted
36525 \begin_layout Subsection
36527 \begin_inset Index idx
36530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36539 \begin_layout Standard
36540 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your LaTeX-syst
36544 \begin_layout Subsection
36546 \begin_inset Index idx
36549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36550 LyX ! Reconfigure|see
36554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36561 Reconfiguration of LyX
36565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36578 \begin_inset Index idx
36581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36582 Reconfiguration of LyX
36590 \begin_layout Standard
36591 This menu entry reconfigures LyX; that is, LyX looks for LaTeX-packages
36592 and programs it needs; see also section
36593 \begin_inset space ~
36597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36599 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
36606 \begin_layout Subsection
36610 \begin_layout Standard
36611 The preferences dialog is described in detail in appendix
36612 \begin_inset space ~
36616 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36618 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
36625 \begin_layout Section
36627 \begin_inset Index idx
36630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36639 \begin_layout Standard
36640 This menu lists the documentation files of LyX in the language of LyX's
36642 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
36646 \begin_layout Standard
36650 \begin_inset space ~
36655 shows a LyX-document with information about the LaTeX-packages and classes
36656 found by LyX (see also section
36657 \begin_inset space ~
36661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36663 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
36670 \begin_layout Section
36672 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36674 name "sec:Toolbars"
36681 \begin_layout Standard
36682 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
36683 \begin_inset space ~
36687 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36689 reference "sub:Toolbars"
36696 \begin_layout Standard
36697 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
36698 This is described in the
36700 Additional Features
36705 \begin_layout Subsection
36707 \begin_inset Index idx
36710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36719 \begin_layout Standard
36720 \begin_inset Graphics
36721 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
36729 \begin_layout Standard
36730 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36736 \begin_layout Standard
36737 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
36742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36754 \begin_inset Note Note
36757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36758 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
36763 manual for more information.
36771 \begin_layout Standard
36772 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36778 \begin_layout Standard
36779 \begin_inset Tabular
36780 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
36781 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
36782 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
36783 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
36785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36789 \begin_inset Graphics
36790 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
36800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36804 pull-down box for the environments
36817 \begin_layout Standard
36818 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
36824 \begin_layout Standard
36826 \begin_inset Tabular
36827 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
36828 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
36829 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
36830 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
36831 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36854 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36861 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36884 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36891 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36914 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36921 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36930 arg "dialog-show print"
36938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36944 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36951 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36960 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
36968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36974 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
36981 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37004 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37011 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37034 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37041 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37064 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37071 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37094 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37101 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37124 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37131 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37140 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
37148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37154 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37156 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37164 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37173 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37180 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
37188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37194 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37196 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37200 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37204 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37213 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37222 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
37230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37236 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37237 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37244 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37265 Emphasize text, function of the
37267 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37269 \begin_inset space ~
37272 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37281 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37302 Set text to noun style, function of the
37304 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37306 \begin_inset space ~
37309 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37318 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37327 arg "textstyle-apply"
37335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37339 Format text using the current settings in the
37341 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37343 \begin_inset space ~
37346 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37355 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37378 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37379 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37381 \begin_inset space ~
37390 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37399 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
37407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37413 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37420 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37427 arg "tabular-insert"
37435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37441 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37448 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37457 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
37465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37469 Toggle outline window on/off,
37471 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37478 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37487 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
37495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37499 Toggle math toolbar on/off
37505 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37514 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
37522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37526 Toggle table toolbar on/off
37539 \begin_layout Subsection
37541 \begin_inset Index idx
37544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37553 \begin_layout Standard
37554 \begin_inset Graphics
37555 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
37563 \begin_layout Standard
37564 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37570 \begin_layout Standard
37571 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
37575 \begin_layout Standard
37576 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37582 \begin_layout Standard
37583 \begin_inset Tabular
37584 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
37585 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37586 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
37587 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
37588 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37615 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37624 arg "layout Enumerate"
37632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37642 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37651 arg "layout Itemize"
37659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37669 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37696 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37705 arg "layout Description"
37713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37723 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37732 arg "depth-increment"
37740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37746 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37748 \begin_inset space ~
37752 \begin_inset space ~
37761 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37770 arg "depth-decrement"
37778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37784 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37786 \begin_inset space ~
37790 \begin_inset space ~
37799 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37808 arg "float-insert figure"
37816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37822 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37823 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37830 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37839 arg "float-insert table"
37847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37853 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37854 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37861 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37884 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37891 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37900 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
37908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37914 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37921 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37930 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
37938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37944 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37951 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37974 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37976 \begin_inset space ~
37985 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37994 arg "nomencl-insert"
38002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38008 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38010 \begin_inset space ~
38019 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38028 arg "footnote-insert"
38036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38042 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38049 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38058 arg "marginalnote-insert"
38066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38072 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38074 \begin_inset space ~
38083 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38106 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38107 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38120 \begin_inset space ~
38129 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38138 arg "box-insert Frameless"
38146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38152 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38159 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38182 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38189 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38212 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38229 \begin_inset space ~
38238 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38247 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
38255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38261 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38262 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38269 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38278 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
38286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38292 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38293 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38295 \begin_inset space ~
38304 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38313 arg "dialog-show character"
38321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38327 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38329 \begin_inset space ~
38332 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38339 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38348 arg "layout-paragraph"
38356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38362 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38364 \begin_inset space ~
38373 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38382 arg "thesaurus-entry"
38390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38396 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38410 \begin_layout Subsection
38411 View/Update Toolbar
38412 \begin_inset Index idx
38415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38416 Toolbar ! View / Update
38424 \begin_layout Standard
38425 \begin_inset Graphics
38426 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
38433 \begin_layout Standard
38434 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38440 \begin_layout Standard
38441 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38445 \begin_layout Standard
38446 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38452 \begin_layout Standard
38453 \begin_inset Tabular
38454 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
38455 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38456 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
38457 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0">
38458 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38481 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38488 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38497 arg "buffer-update"
38505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38511 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38518 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38527 arg "master-buffer-view"
38535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38541 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38543 \begin_inset space ~
38552 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38561 arg "master-buffer-update"
38569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38575 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38577 \begin_inset space ~
38581 \begin_inset space ~
38590 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38599 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
38607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38613 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38614 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38615 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38616 Synchronize with Output
38622 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38627 \begin_inset Graphics
38628 filename ../images/view-others.png
38630 groupId toolbarbuttons
38641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38647 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38648 View (Other Formats)
38654 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38659 \begin_inset Graphics
38660 filename ../images/update-others.png
38662 groupId toolbarbuttons
38671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38677 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38678 Update (Other Formats)
38691 \begin_layout Standard
38692 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
38696 \begin_layout Subsection
38700 \begin_layout Standard
38701 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
38702 \begin_inset space ~
38706 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38708 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
38712 , the table toolbar
38713 \begin_inset Index idx
38716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38725 \begin_inset space ~
38730 manual and the math macro toolbar
38731 \begin_inset Index idx
38734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38747 \begin_layout Chapter
38748 The Document Settings
38749 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38751 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
38756 \begin_inset Index idx
38759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38760 Document ! Settings
38768 \begin_layout Standard
38769 The document settings dialog contains submenus to set properties for the
38770 whole document and is called with the menu
38772 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38776 You can save your document settings as default with the
38778 Save as Document Defaults
38780 button in the dialog.
38781 This will create a template named
38785 which is automatically loaded by LyX when you create a new document without
38789 \begin_layout Standard
38794 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
38795 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
38798 \begin_layout Standard
38799 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
38802 \begin_layout Section
38806 \begin_layout Standard
38807 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
38809 Document classes are described in section
38810 \begin_inset space ~
38814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38816 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
38824 \begin_layout Standard
38828 \begin_inset space ~
38833 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in LyX's
38837 folder and thus not recognized by LyX as layout for a document class.
38838 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
38840 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
38849 \begin_layout Standard
38850 Some classes use special class options by default.
38851 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
38855 and you can decide to use them or not.
38856 If you do not exactly know what the default class options are for, it is
38857 recommended to leave them untouched.
38862 is used for LaTeX's graphics, color and page layout packages.
38867 , the default driver for the LaTeX-packages is used.
38868 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
38873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38874 When you want to use one of the following drivers
38875 \begin_inset Newline newline
38880 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
38883 \begin_inset Newline newline
38886 you first have to activate them in your LaTeX distribution, see section
38892 \begin_inset CommandInset href
38894 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
38906 \begin_layout Standard
38907 Specifying a master document is necessary if the current document is a child
38909 The master document will be used by LyX in the background if the child
38910 document is opened without its master.
38911 This way child documents are always compilable.
38912 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
38919 \begin_inset space ~
38927 \begin_layout Standard
38928 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the LaTeX-package
38938 \begin_inset Index idx
38941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38942 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
38948 \begin_inset Index idx
38951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38952 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
38957 for cross-references, see sec.
38958 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38964 reference "sec:Cross-References"
38971 \begin_layout Section
38975 \begin_layout Standard
38976 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
38977 Please refer to the section
38980 \begin_inset space ~
38988 \begin_inset space ~
38993 manual for details.
38996 \begin_layout Section
39000 \begin_layout Standard
39001 Modules are explained in section
39002 \begin_inset space ~
39006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39008 reference "sub:Modules"
39015 \begin_layout Section
39019 \begin_layout Standard
39021 \begin_inset space ~
39025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39027 reference "sub:Local-Layout"
39034 \begin_layout Section
39038 \begin_layout Standard
39039 The document font settings are described in section
39040 \begin_inset space ~
39044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39046 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
39053 \begin_layout Section
39057 \begin_layout Standard
39058 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by indentations or vertical
39060 The line spacing and the number of text columns can also be specified here.
39063 \begin_layout Standard
39064 Note that LyX will not show two columns or the set up line spacing on screen.
39065 That would be impractical, often unreadable and is not part of the WYSIWYM
39067 However, it will be as you specified it in the output.
39070 \begin_layout Section
39074 \begin_layout Standard
39075 A description of this menu is given in section
39076 \begin_inset space ~
39080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39082 reference "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
39087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39089 reference "sub:Document-Layout"
39096 \begin_layout Section
39100 \begin_layout Standard
39101 Here you can adjust the paper margins, see section
39102 \begin_inset space ~
39106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39108 reference "sub:Margins"
39115 \begin_layout Section
39117 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39119 name "sec:Language-encodings"
39124 \begin_inset Index idx
39127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39128 Language ! Encoding
39136 \begin_layout Standard
39137 The document language and quote styles are set here.
39138 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to LaTeX (the
39139 LyX file is always encoded in utf8).
39140 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
39141 be exported as LaTeX-commands (this can fail if a LaTeX-command is not
39142 known for a particular character).
39146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39147 The known commands are defined in a text file (
39152 You can add commands for unknown symbols to that file yourself, see the
39157 manual for details.
39165 \begin_layout Standard
39166 If you use the option
39170 , LyX determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
39171 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
39172 than one encoding in the LaTeX file.
39173 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
39174 exactly one encoding.
39175 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
39178 \begin_layout Standard
39179 LyX also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
39180 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
39181 If you want to use this (and your LaTeX installation supports Unicode),
39182 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
39183 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard LaTeX is quite incomplete,
39184 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
39189 (when LyX uses its list of known LaTeX-commands), but does not work with
39190 a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known LaTeX-commands is not used,
39191 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
39192 The situation is much better with XeTeX and LuaTeX, two new alternative
39193 engines to standard LaTeX.
39194 Both engines support Unicode natively.
39195 LyX now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
39198 \begin_inset space ~
39205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39217 \begin_inset space ~
39224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39236 \begin_inset space ~
39242 \begin_inset space ~
39246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39248 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
39253 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
39257 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
39260 \begin_layout Standard
39264 \begin_inset space ~
39269 determines the LaTeX-package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
39271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39279 The possible settings are:
39282 \begin_layout Description
39283 Default uses the language package that is selected in
39285 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39286 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39290 \begin_inset space ~
39294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39296 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
39303 \begin_layout Description
39304 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
39305 format you will use.
39306 In many cases this will be
39311 \begin_inset Index idx
39314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39315 LaTeX-packages ! babel
39321 If the newer package
39326 \begin_inset Index idx
39329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39330 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
39335 is more appropriate (is the case when using XeTeX and/or non-TeX fonts),
39336 this package will be used instead of
39343 \begin_layout Description
39345 \begin_inset space ~
39356 would be more appropriate.
39359 \begin_layout Description
39360 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
39361 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
39365 (for German texts), type in
39368 \begin_inset Newline newline
39373 usepackage{ngerman}
39376 \begin_layout Description
39377 None will not use a language package.
39378 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
39381 \begin_layout Standard
39382 Here is a list with the important encodings:
39385 \begin_layout Description
39387 \begin_inset space ~
39391 \begin_inset space ~
39395 \begin_inset space ~
39402 , but the LaTeX-package
39407 \begin_inset Index idx
39410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39411 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
39417 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
39418 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
39419 languages in TeX code.
39422 \begin_layout Description
39423 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
39424 LyX converts all other characters into LaTeX commands, which may result
39425 in a big file when lots of LaTeX-commands are needed.
39428 \begin_layout Description
39430 \begin_inset space ~
39434 \begin_inset space ~
39437 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
39440 \begin_layout Description
39442 \begin_inset space ~
39446 \begin_inset space ~
39449 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
39452 \begin_layout Description
39454 \begin_inset space ~
39457 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
39460 \begin_layout Description
39462 \begin_inset space ~
39466 \begin_inset space ~
39469 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
39470 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
39473 \begin_layout Description
39475 \begin_inset space ~
39479 \begin_inset space ~
39482 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
39486 \begin_layout Description
39488 \begin_inset space ~
39492 \begin_inset space ~
39495 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
39496 ISO-8859-13 encoding
39499 \begin_layout Description
39501 \begin_inset space ~
39505 \begin_inset space ~
39509 \begin_inset space ~
39512 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
39513 \begin_inset space ~
39519 \begin_layout Description
39521 \begin_inset space ~
39525 \begin_inset space ~
39529 \begin_inset space ~
39532 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
39533 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
39536 \begin_layout Description
39538 \begin_inset space ~
39542 \begin_inset space ~
39545 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
39546 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
39547 is not available for LaTeX you should try to use the encoding Unicode
39548 \begin_inset space ~
39552 \begin_inset space ~
39558 \begin_layout Description
39560 \begin_inset space ~
39564 \begin_inset space ~
39567 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
39568 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
39569 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for LaTeX
39570 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
39571 \begin_inset space ~
39575 \begin_inset space ~
39581 \begin_layout Description
39583 \begin_inset space ~
39587 \begin_inset space ~
39590 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
39593 \begin_layout Description
39595 \begin_inset space ~
39599 \begin_inset space ~
39602 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
39605 \begin_layout Description
39607 \begin_inset space ~
39611 \begin_inset space ~
39614 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
39617 \begin_layout Description
39619 \begin_inset space ~
39622 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
39625 \begin_layout Description
39627 \begin_inset space ~
39630 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
39633 \begin_layout Description
39635 \begin_inset space ~
39639 \begin_inset space ~
39642 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
39645 \begin_layout Description
39647 \begin_inset space ~
39651 \begin_inset space ~
39657 \begin_layout Description
39659 \begin_inset space ~
39663 \begin_inset space ~
39666 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
39669 \begin_layout Description
39671 \begin_inset space ~
39675 \begin_inset space ~
39681 \begin_layout Description
39683 \begin_inset space ~
39687 \begin_inset space ~
39690 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
39695 \begin_inset Index idx
39698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39699 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
39704 , when using this, set the document language to
39709 \begin_layout Description
39711 \begin_inset space ~
39715 \begin_inset space ~
39718 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
39722 , when using this, set the document language to
39725 \begin_inset space ~
39731 \begin_layout Description
39733 \begin_inset space ~
39737 \begin_inset space ~
39740 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
39745 \begin_inset Index idx
39748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39749 LaTeX-packages ! japanese
39754 , when using this, set the document language to
39759 \begin_layout Description
39761 \begin_inset space ~
39765 \begin_inset space ~
39768 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
39772 , when using this, set the document language to
39777 \begin_layout Description
39779 \begin_inset space ~
39783 \begin_inset space ~
39786 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
39790 , when using this, set the document language to
39795 \begin_layout Description
39797 \begin_inset space ~
39800 (EUC-KR) for Korean
39803 \begin_layout Description
39805 \begin_inset space ~
39809 \begin_inset space ~
39813 \begin_inset space ~
39816 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
39819 \begin_layout Description
39821 \begin_inset space ~
39825 \begin_inset space ~
39829 \begin_inset space ~
39832 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
39833 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
39834 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
39837 \begin_layout Description
39839 \begin_inset space ~
39843 \begin_inset space ~
39849 \begin_layout Description
39851 \begin_inset space ~
39855 \begin_inset space ~
39858 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
39859 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
39862 \begin_layout Description
39864 \begin_inset space ~
39868 \begin_inset space ~
39871 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the LaTeX-package
39876 \begin_inset Index idx
39879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39880 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
39885 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
39888 \begin_layout Description
39890 \begin_inset space ~
39894 \begin_inset space ~
39897 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
39905 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the LaTeX-package
39910 LyX automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview XeTeX
39912 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
39915 \begin_layout Description
39917 \begin_inset space ~
39921 \begin_inset space ~
39924 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
39929 \begin_inset Index idx
39932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39933 LaTeX-packages ! ucs
39938 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
39941 \begin_layout Description
39943 \begin_inset space ~
39946 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
39951 \begin_inset Index idx
39954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39955 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
39961 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
39965 \begin_layout Description
39967 \begin_inset space ~
39971 \begin_inset space ~
39975 \begin_inset space ~
39978 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
39979 \begin_inset space ~
39985 \begin_layout Description
39987 \begin_inset space ~
39991 \begin_inset space ~
39995 \begin_inset space ~
39998 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
39999 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
40000 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
40004 \begin_layout Description
40006 \begin_inset space ~
40010 \begin_inset space ~
40014 \begin_inset space ~
40017 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
40018 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
40021 \begin_layout Standard
40022 Finally, the dialog lets you select a specific language package for the
40025 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40029 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40031 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
40035 for more information on the language package.
40038 \begin_layout Section
40040 \begin_inset Index idx
40043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40050 \begin_inset Index idx
40053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40062 \begin_layout Standard
40063 Here you can alter the font color for the main text (default: black) and
40065 \begin_inset space ~
40068 out notes (default: light grey).
40073 sets the color back to the default.
40076 \begin_layout Standard
40077 You can also change the background color for the pages (default: white)
40079 \begin_inset space ~
40082 boxes (default: red).
40085 \begin_layout Standard
40086 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40090 The colors are not shown within LyX, only in the output.
40092 \begin_inset space ~
40095 out note appears blue in the output.)
40103 \begin_layout Standard
40104 Note, if you change the main text font color and use the option
40107 \begin_inset space ~
40112 in the document settings under
40115 \begin_inset space ~
40120 , you probably also need to change the link font color by using
40123 \begin_inset space ~
40131 \begin_inset space ~
40137 For example the option
40140 \begin_layout Standard
40146 \begin_layout Standard
40147 sets the link text color to black.
40148 For more information, see the manual of the LaTeX-package
40153 \begin_inset Index idx
40156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40157 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
40163 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40172 \begin_layout Standard
40173 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
40179 \begin_layout Standard
40180 You can adapt the main text font color and the page background for every
40181 page in your document if you use these commands as TeX
40182 \begin_inset space ~
40185 Code behind a forced page break:
40188 \begin_layout Itemize
40189 For the page color:
40190 \begin_inset Newline newline
40197 pagecolor{color name}
40200 \begin_layout Itemize
40201 For the text color:
40202 \begin_inset Newline newline
40212 \begin_layout Standard
40213 The color name can hereby be one of these:
40246 \begin_inset Newline newline
40249 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use them under the
40253 \begin_layout Itemize
40254 For the page background color:
40255 \begin_inset Newline newline
40260 page_backgroundcolor
40263 \begin_layout Itemize
40264 For the main text color:
40265 \begin_inset Newline newline
40273 \begin_layout Itemize
40275 \begin_inset space ~
40278 box background color:
40279 \begin_inset Newline newline
40287 \begin_layout Itemize
40289 \begin_inset space ~
40292 out note text color:
40293 \begin_inset Newline newline
40301 \begin_layout Standard
40302 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
40305 \begin_inset space ~
40313 \begin_inset space ~
40321 \begin_layout Section
40325 \begin_layout Standard
40326 Here you can adjust the numbering depth of section headings and the section
40327 depth in the table of contents as described in section
40328 \begin_inset space ~
40332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40334 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
40341 \begin_layout Section
40345 \begin_layout Standard
40346 Here you can specify a citation style using the LaTeX packages
40351 \begin_inset Index idx
40354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40355 LaTeX-packages ! natbib
40365 \begin_inset Index idx
40368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40369 LaTeX-packages ! jurabib
40375 You can enable a sectioned bibliography using the LaTeX package
40380 \begin_inset Index idx
40383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40384 LaTeX-packages ! bibtopic
40389 and you can customize how the bibliography of the given document is being
40391 For a further description see section
40392 \begin_inset space ~
40396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40398 reference "sec:Bibliography"
40405 \begin_layout Section
40409 \begin_layout Standard
40410 Here, you can customize how the index of your document is being generated
40411 and you can define additional indexes.
40412 Please refer to section
40413 \begin_inset space ~
40417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40419 reference "sec:Index"
40426 \begin_layout Section
40430 \begin_layout Standard
40431 The PDF properties are explained in section
40432 \begin_inset space ~
40436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40438 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
40445 \begin_layout Section
40449 \begin_layout Standard
40450 These options will force LyX to use the LaTeX-packages
40455 \begin_inset Index idx
40458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40459 LaTeX-packages ! amsmath
40469 \begin_inset Index idx
40472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40473 LaTeX-packages ! esint
40483 \begin_inset Index idx
40486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40487 LaTeX-packages ! mathdots
40497 \begin_inset Index idx
40500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40501 LaTeX-packages ! mhchem
40506 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
40509 \begin_layout Description
40510 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas,
40511 ensure that you have enabled
40514 \begin_inset space ~
40522 \begin_layout Description
40523 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
40526 \begin_inset space ~
40538 \begin_layout Description
40539 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
40550 \begin_layout Description
40551 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
40553 Chemical Symbols and Equations
40562 \begin_layout Section
40566 \begin_layout Standard
40567 The float placement options are described in section
40570 \begin_inset space ~
40578 \begin_inset space ~
40586 \begin_layout Section
40590 \begin_layout Standard
40591 The listings settings are explained in chapter
40593 Program Code Listings
40598 \begin_inset space ~
40606 \begin_layout Section
40610 \begin_layout Standard
40611 Here you can adjust the characters for the itemize levels.
40612 The itemize environment is described in section
40613 \begin_inset space ~
40617 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40619 reference "sec:Itemize"
40626 \begin_layout Section
40630 \begin_layout Standard
40631 Branches are described in section
40632 \begin_inset space ~
40636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40638 reference "sec:Branches"
40645 \begin_layout Section
40647 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40649 name "sec:Doc-Output"
40656 \begin_layout Standard
40657 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
40660 \begin_layout Description
40662 \begin_inset space ~
40666 \begin_inset space ~
40669 Format: The format that is used when you hit
40670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40689 View Master Document
40690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40697 Update Master Document
40698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40705 menu or the toolbar.
40706 The default is set in
40708 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40709 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40713 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40719 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40726 \begin_layout Description
40728 \begin_inset space ~
40732 \begin_inset space ~
40735 Output settings for the menu
40737 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40739 \begin_inset space ~
40745 For a detailed description see section
40747 Reverse DVI/PDF search
40752 \begin_inset space ~
40760 \begin_layout Description
40762 \begin_inset space ~
40766 \begin_inset space ~
40769 Options settings for the export format
40777 \begin_inset space ~
40782 will assure that the output follows exactly version
40783 \begin_inset space ~
40786 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
40790 \begin_inset space ~
40795 settings are described in detail in section
40797 Math Output in XHTML
40802 \begin_inset space ~
40808 The scaling is used for the size of equations in the output.
40811 \begin_layout Section
40816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40826 \begin_layout Standard
40827 In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages
40828 or to define LaTeX-commands.
40829 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
40830 You should not enter commands here until you exactly know what you are
40834 \begin_layout Standard
40835 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
40836 \begin_inset space ~
40840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40842 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
40849 \begin_layout Chapter
40855 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40857 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40862 \begin_inset Index idx
40865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40874 \begin_layout Standard
40875 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
40877 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40881 It has the following submenus.
40884 \begin_layout Section
40888 \begin_layout Subsection
40892 \begin_layout Subsubsection
40893 User Interface File
40894 \begin_inset Index idx
40897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40898 Customization ! of toolbars
40904 \begin_inset Index idx
40907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40908 Customization ! of menus
40916 \begin_layout Standard
40917 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
40918 interface (ui) file.
40919 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
40927 \begin_layout Description
40932 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
40935 \begin_layout Description
40942 the menu entries in popup context menus
40945 \begin_layout Description
40950 specifies the toolbar buttons
40953 \begin_layout Standard
40954 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
40955 and edit the entries.
40958 \begin_layout Standard
40959 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
40971 entries must be finished with an explicit
40996 and in the case of the
40997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41009 The syntax for the entries is:
41012 \begin_layout Standard
41013 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
41019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41041 \begin_layout Standard
41043 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
41046 All the LyX-functions are listed in the menu
41048 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41061 \begin_inset space ~
41069 \begin_layout Standard
41070 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
41076 \begin_layout Standard
41077 For example, assuming you use the menu
41079 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41082 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
41086 \begin_layout Standard
41087 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
41093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41111 \begin_layout Standard
41113 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
41117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41128 to have the sixth bookmark.
41131 \begin_layout Standard
41135 \begin_inset space ~
41140 allows you to change the appearance of LyX's toolbar buttons.
41141 The currently available icon sets are compared in
41142 \begin_inset CommandInset href
41145 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
41152 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41156 \begin_layout Standard
41159 Enable tool tips in main work area
41161 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
41165 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41169 \begin_layout Standard
41172 Restore window layouts and geometries
41174 LyX's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used
41175 in the last LyX session.
41178 \begin_layout Standard
41181 Restore cursor positions
41183 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
41187 \begin_layout Standard
41190 Load opened files from last session
41192 opens all files that were opened in the last LyX session.
41195 \begin_layout Standard
41198 Clear all session information
41200 deletes all information from previous LyX sessions (cursor positions, names
41201 of last opened documents, etc.).
41204 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41206 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41208 name "sub:Backup documents"
41213 \begin_inset Index idx
41216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41225 \begin_layout Standard
41228 Backup original documents when saving
41230 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
41231 it was saved the last time.
41232 It is stored in the
41235 \begin_inset space ~
41241 \begin_inset space ~
41245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41247 reference "sec:Paths"
41251 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
41254 \begin_inset space ~
41260 The backup file has the file extension
41261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41275 \begin_layout Standard
41278 Backup documents, every
41280 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
41283 \begin_layout Standard
41286 Save documents compressed by default
41288 always saves files in a compressed format.
41291 \begin_layout Standard
41296 is the number of last opened files that LyX should display in the menu
41299 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41301 \begin_inset space ~
41312 \begin_layout Standard
41315 Open documents in tabs
41317 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of LyX.
41320 \begin_layout Standard
41325 is only active if a LyXServer pipe
41329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41331 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41335 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41337 reference "sec:Paths"
41341 for information about LyXServer pipes.
41347 If it is checked, LyX documents will be opened in the same running instance
41349 Otherwise a new LyX instance is created for each file.
41352 \begin_layout Standard
41355 Single close-tab button
41357 is checked, there will only be one close button (
41360 \begin_inset Graphics
41361 filename ../images/closetab.png
41368 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
41369 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
41372 \begin_layout Standard
41373 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41381 For the last option you have to restart LyX before the change takes effect.
41389 \begin_layout Subsection
41391 \begin_inset Index idx
41394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41401 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41403 name "sub:Screen-Fonts"
41410 \begin_layout Standard
41411 These fonts are used to display your documents within LyX.
41414 \begin_layout Standard
41415 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41423 This section only deals with the fonts
41428 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
41431 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41432 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
41443 \begin_layout Standard
41444 By default, LyX uses
41460 (depends on the system) as its
41463 \begin_inset space ~
41479 \begin_layout Standard
41480 You can change the font size with the
41487 \begin_layout Standard
41492 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
41494 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41497 points have the size of 1
41498 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41502 \begin_inset space ~
41506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41508 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
41513 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
41514 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41518 The sizes are explained in detail in section
41519 \begin_inset space ~
41523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41525 reference "sub:Document-Font"
41532 \begin_layout Standard
41535 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
41537 enabled, LyX needs to redraw the screen less often.
41538 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
41539 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
41540 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
41542 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
41543 \begin_inset space ~
41549 \begin_layout Subsection
41551 \begin_inset Index idx
41554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41561 \begin_inset Index idx
41564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41573 \begin_layout Standard
41574 Here you can change the screen colors used by LyX by choosing an item in
41575 the list and selecting the
41582 \begin_layout Standard
41583 By checking the option
41587 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
41590 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
41591 \begin_inset space ~
41595 \begin_inset space ~
41600 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
41603 \begin_layout Subsection
41605 \begin_inset Index idx
41608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41617 \begin_layout Standard
41618 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside LyX.
41621 \begin_layout Standard
41626 enables previewing snippets of your document.
41627 This feature is described in section
41628 \begin_inset space ~
41632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41634 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41641 \begin_layout Standard
41642 Checking the option
41645 \begin_inset space ~
41649 \begin_inset space ~
41653 \begin_inset space ~
41658 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
41661 \begin_layout Section
41663 \begin_inset Index idx
41666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41675 \begin_layout Subsection
41679 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41683 \begin_layout Standard
41686 Cursor follows scrollbar
41688 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
41692 \begin_layout Standard
41693 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
41694 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
41695 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
41698 \begin_layout Standard
41701 Scroll below end of document
41703 is self-explanatory.
41706 \begin_layout Standard
41707 In LyX one can jump from word to word by pressing
41714 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
41716 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
41717 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
41720 \begin_layout Standard
41723 Sort environments alphabetically
41725 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
41728 \begin_layout Standard
41731 Group environments by their category
41733 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
41736 \begin_layout Standard
41741 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
41752 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41756 \begin_layout Standard
41757 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
41762 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
41763 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
41767 \begin_layout Subsection
41769 \begin_inset Index idx
41772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41779 \begin_inset Index idx
41782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41783 Settings ! Shortcuts
41791 \begin_layout Standard
41796 specifies the file to be used to bind a LyX-function to a key.
41797 Several binding files are available, among them:
41800 \begin_layout Description
41801 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
41804 \begin_layout Description
41805 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
41817 \begin_layout Description
41818 mac.bind a set of bindings for
41821 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41829 \begin_layout Standard
41830 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
41835 , and binding files for special languages.
41836 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
41837 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41841 \begin_inset space \space{}
41845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41853 If you use LyX in a certain language, LyX will try to use the appropriate
41857 \begin_layout Standard
41858 Some binding files, like
41862 , only have a limited scope.
41863 When looking at the end of the file
41867 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
41870 \begin_layout Standard
41874 \begin_inset space ~
41882 \begin_inset space ~
41887 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
41888 in the selected key binding file.
41891 \begin_layout Subsubsection
41893 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41895 name "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
41900 \begin_inset Index idx
41903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41904 Key Bindings ! Editing
41912 \begin_layout Standard
41913 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
41914 the table in the dialog that lists all LyX-functions and the bound shortcuts.
41915 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
41918 Show key-bindings containing
41921 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
41922 Insert there for example as keyword
41923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41930 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
41931 functions that contain
41932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41940 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
41941 All LyX-functions are also listed in the file
41945 that you will find in the
41952 \begin_layout Standard
41953 For example, to add the shortcut
41961 , select the function and press the
41966 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
41967 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
41970 \begin_layout Standard
41971 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
41972 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the LyX
41973 Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the
41974 different function names as a semicolon separated list.
41975 LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
41980 \begin_layout Standard
41981 If you don't like a a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
41984 \begin_layout Standard
41985 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
41987 The syntax of the entries is:
41990 \begin_layout Standard
41996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42014 \begin_layout Subsection
42016 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42018 name "sub:Keyboard-Map"
42023 \begin_inset Index idx
42026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42033 \begin_inset Index idx
42036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42037 Settings ! Keyboard Map
42045 \begin_layout Standard
42046 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
42047 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps.
42048 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
42049 is a Romanian one, you can enable
42052 \begin_inset space ~
42056 \begin_inset space ~
42061 and select the keyboard map file named
42068 \begin_layout Standard
42077 keyboard map and, if you use the
42081 bindings, you can select the first and second with
42084 arg "keymap-primary"
42090 arg "keymap-secondary"
42093 respectively or toggle between them with
42096 arg "keymap-toggle"
42102 \begin_layout Standard
42103 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42111 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
42120 \begin_layout Standard
42121 You can also specify the mouse
42123 Wheel scrolling speed
42126 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
42130 \begin_layout Standard
42138 \begin_inset space ~
42142 \begin_inset space ~
42147 you can select a key for zooming.
42148 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
42151 \begin_layout Subsection
42155 \begin_layout Standard
42156 Input completion is described in section
42157 \begin_inset space ~
42161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42163 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
42170 \begin_layout Section
42172 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42179 \begin_inset Index idx
42182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42189 \begin_inset Index idx
42192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42201 \begin_layout Standard
42202 The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during
42204 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
42207 \begin_layout Description
42209 \begin_inset space ~
42212 directory This is LyX's working directory.
42213 It is the default when you
42224 \begin_inset space ~
42232 \begin_layout Description
42234 \begin_inset space ~
42237 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
42239 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42241 \begin_inset space ~
42245 \begin_inset space ~
42253 \begin_layout Description
42255 \begin_inset space ~
42258 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
42264 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42268 \begin_inset Newline newline
42272 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42284 button does not exist when using LyX on Mac OS and Windows systems.
42292 \begin_layout Description
42294 \begin_inset space ~
42298 \begin_inset Index idx
42301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42307 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
42308 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
42309 \begin_inset space ~
42313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42315 reference "sub:Backup documents"
42323 will be used to save the backups.
42324 \begin_inset Newline newline
42327 Backup files have the ending
42328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42338 \begin_layout Description
42343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42351 \begin_inset space ~
42354 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
42355 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to LyX.
42356 \begin_inset Newline newline
42363 You add a BibTeX-database
42368 You can edit this file with the program
42377 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for LyX in its preferences under
42380 \begin_inset space ~
42386 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
42391 and click on the LyX-symbol.
42392 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
42398 and LyX need to be running the same time.
42399 \begin_inset Newline newline
42402 The pipe is also used for the
42411 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42417 reference "sub:Backup documents"
42422 \begin_inset Newline newline
42425 To use the LyXServer-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
42426 \begin_inset Newline newline
42442 \begin_layout Description
42444 \begin_inset space ~
42447 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
42450 \begin_layout Description
42452 \begin_inset space ~
42455 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
42456 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
42457 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
42460 \begin_layout Description
42462 \begin_inset space ~
42465 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
42471 You only need to specify it if you are using
42475 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
42481 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
42485 \begin_layout Description
42487 \begin_inset space ~
42490 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
42491 When LyX needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see
42492 where to find it on the system.
42493 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when LyX
42494 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
42496 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42500 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42503 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
42504 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
42507 \begin_layout Description
42509 \begin_inset space ~
42512 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
42513 which are included in a LyX document via commands in TeX code or in the
42515 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
42517 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
42518 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
42519 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
42520 scanned for the input files.
42521 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
42522 to be relative to the directory of your LyX file.
42523 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
42524 compilation may fail for some documents.
42527 \begin_layout Section
42531 \begin_layout Standard
42532 Here you can insert your
42541 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
42543 \begin_inset space ~
42547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42549 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42553 , to mark changes you make as yours.
42556 \begin_layout Section
42558 \begin_inset Index idx
42561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42562 Language ! Settings
42568 \begin_inset Index idx
42571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42572 Settings ! Language
42580 \begin_layout Subsection
42582 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42584 name "sub:Prefs-Language"
42591 \begin_layout Description
42593 \begin_inset space ~
42597 \begin_inset space ~
42600 language Here you can select the language for LyX's menus.
42601 You can find its actual translation status here:
42602 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42604 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
42611 \begin_layout Description
42613 \begin_inset space ~
42616 package determines which LaTeX package should be loaded to handle language
42618 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
42619 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
42620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42636 The most widespread language package is
42641 \begin_inset Index idx
42644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42645 LaTeX-packages ! babel
42650 ; it is the default language package in classic LaTeX.
42651 More recent typesetting engines such as XeTeX and LuaTeX come with the
42652 alternative language package
42657 \begin_inset Index idx
42660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42661 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
42666 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
42667 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
42673 The available selections are described in section
42674 \begin_inset space ~
42678 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42680 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
42687 \begin_layout Description
42689 \begin_inset space ~
42692 start If a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document
42693 language, you can here specify the command to start the package.
42694 An example is the start command
42700 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
42705 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42720 selectlanguage{$$lang}
42725 \begin_layout Description
42727 \begin_inset space ~
42735 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
42736 command toggles the package on and off.
42739 \begin_layout Description
42741 \begin_inset space ~
42745 \begin_inset space ~
42748 Point Define the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
42752 \begin_layout Description
42754 \begin_inset space ~
42758 \begin_inset space ~
42761 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
42762 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
42763 used by all LaTeX-packages.
42764 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
42771 \begin_layout Description
42773 \begin_inset space ~
42776 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
42778 When this option is not set, the
42781 \begin_inset space ~
42786 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the LaTeX-output.
42787 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
42790 \begin_inset space ~
42798 \begin_layout Description
42800 \begin_inset space ~
42806 \begin_inset space ~
42812 When it is not set, the
42815 \begin_inset space ~
42820 is set to the end of the document.
42823 \begin_layout Description
42825 \begin_inset space ~
42829 \begin_inset space ~
42832 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
42833 language will be underlined in blue.
42836 \begin_layout Description
42838 \begin_inset space ~
42842 \begin_inset space ~
42845 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
42846 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
42849 \begin_layout Description
42851 \begin_inset space ~
42854 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
42855 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
42856 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
42857 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
42860 \begin_layout Subsection
42864 \begin_layout Standard
42865 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
42866 \begin_inset space ~
42870 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42872 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
42879 \begin_layout Section
42883 \begin_layout Subsection
42887 \begin_layout Description
42889 \begin_inset space ~
42893 \begin_inset space ~
42896 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
42899 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42900 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42902 \begin_inset space ~
42908 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
42911 \begin_layout Description
42913 \begin_inset space ~
42917 \begin_inset Index idx
42920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42927 \begin_inset Index idx
42930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42931 Settings ! Date format
42936 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
42937 \begin_inset Newline newline
42941 \begin_inset Flex URL
42944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42946 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
42952 \begin_inset Newline newline
42955 For example the format
42956 \begin_inset Newline newline
42960 \begin_inset Newline newline
42963 prints the date as day/month/year.
42966 \begin_layout Description
42968 \begin_inset space ~
42972 \begin_inset space ~
42975 export Setting what LyX is allowed to overwrite on export.
42978 \begin_layout Description
42980 \begin_inset space ~
42983 search Commands that will be used for the menu
42985 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42987 \begin_inset space ~
42993 For a detailed description see section
42995 Reverse DVI/PDF search
43000 \begin_inset space ~
43008 \begin_layout Subsection
43010 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43017 \begin_inset Index idx
43020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43027 \begin_inset Index idx
43030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43039 \begin_layout Description
43041 \begin_inset space ~
43044 printer Here you can specify the name of your
43049 The name will be used when the
43054 \begin_inset Newline newline
43058 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43066 You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect.
43074 \begin_layout Description
43076 \begin_inset space ~
43079 command is the command LyX
43080 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43084 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43087 LaTeX uses for printing.
43095 \begin_layout Description
43097 \begin_inset space ~
43101 \begin_inset space ~
43104 Options Here you can specify printer options.
43105 A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation
43106 of the program that provides the
43113 \begin_layout Description
43115 \begin_inset space ~
43119 \begin_inset space ~
43123 \begin_inset space ~
43126 printer This option works only for the
43131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43143 It activates a configuration file for dvips.
43144 This is an option only for dvips experts.
43147 \begin_layout Subsection
43152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43160 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43162 name "sub:LaTeX-settings"
43167 \begin_inset Index idx
43170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43179 \begin_layout Description
43181 \begin_inset space ~
43188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43196 \begin_inset space ~
43200 \begin_inset space ~
43203 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
43208 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
43229 are used for Cyrillic.
43230 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
43231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43243 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
43244 LyX sets up in the background.
43245 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
43248 \begin_layout Description
43250 \begin_inset space ~
43254 \begin_inset space ~
43257 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
43262 value depends on your LaTeX-system setup.
43265 \begin_layout Description
43267 \begin_inset space ~
43271 \begin_inset space ~
43275 \begin_inset space ~
43279 \begin_inset space ~
43282 options They only have an effect when the program
43286 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
43289 \begin_layout Standard
43290 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
43291 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
43292 manuals of the applications.
43295 \begin_layout Description
43297 \begin_inset space ~
43300 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
43301 \begin_inset space ~
43305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43307 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
43314 \begin_layout Description
43316 \begin_inset space ~
43319 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
43320 \begin_inset space ~
43324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43326 reference "sub:Index-Program"
43333 \begin_layout Description
43335 \begin_inset space ~
43338 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
43339 \begin_inset space ~
43343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43345 reference "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
43352 \begin_layout Description
43357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43365 \begin_inset space ~
43368 command Command for the program
43372 that is described in the section
43378 Additional Features
43383 \begin_layout Standard
43384 There are additionally the following options:
43387 \begin_layout Description
43389 \begin_inset space ~
43393 \begin_inset space ~
43397 \begin_inset space ~
43401 \begin_inset space ~
43405 \begin_inset space ~
43408 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
43409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43426 to separate folders.
43427 This option is enabled by default when you use LyX on Windows.
43428 \begin_inset Index idx
43431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43438 \begin_inset Index idx
43441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43450 \begin_layout Description
43452 \begin_inset space ~
43456 \begin_inset space ~
43460 \begin_inset space ~
43464 \begin_inset space ~
43468 \begin_inset space ~
43472 \begin_inset space ~
43475 changes Removes all manually set
43481 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43482 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43484 \begin_inset space ~
43489 dialog when changing the document class.
43492 \begin_layout Section
43494 \begin_inset space ~
43498 \begin_inset Index idx
43501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43510 \begin_layout Subsection
43512 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43514 name "sub:Converters"
43519 \begin_inset Index idx
43522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43531 \begin_layout Standard
43532 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
43533 from one format to another.
43534 You can modify converters or create new ones.
43535 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
43542 \begin_inset space ~
43547 field and press the
43552 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
43556 \begin_inset space ~
43561 drop-down list, modify the
43565 field and press the
43572 \begin_layout Standard
43575 Converter File Cache
43581 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
43583 Maximum Age (in days
43586 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
43587 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
43590 \begin_layout Standard
43591 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
43592 definition, is described in the section
43603 \begin_layout Subsection
43605 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43607 name "sec:File-Formats"
43612 \begin_inset Index idx
43615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43622 \begin_inset Index idx
43625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43634 \begin_layout Standard
43635 Here you find the list of defined file formats that LyX can handle.
43644 programs that should be used for certain formats.
43647 \begin_layout Standard
43648 You can also define the
43650 Default output format
43652 that is used when you use
43654 View, Update, View Master Document
43658 Update Master Document
43664 menu or the toolbar.
43667 \begin_layout Standard
43668 More about formats and their options is described in the section
43679 \begin_layout Standard
43680 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in LyX's temporary
43681 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
43682 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
43683 This is done by specifying a
43688 More about this is described in the section
43699 \begin_layout Chapter
43700 Units available in LyX
43701 \begin_inset Index idx
43704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43711 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43713 name "chap:Units-available-in"
43720 \begin_layout Standard
43722 \begin_inset space ~
43726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43728 reference "tab:Units"
43732 explains all the units available in LyX and used in this documentation.
43735 \begin_layout Standard
43736 \begin_inset Float table
43742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43743 \begin_inset Caption Standard
43745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43746 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43761 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
43767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43769 \begin_inset Tabular
43770 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
43771 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
43772 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
43773 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0">
43775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43869 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43873 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43897 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43901 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43924 scaled point (65536
43925 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43929 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43953 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43957 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43981 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43985 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
43989 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44013 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44017 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44040 % of original image width
44047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
44218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
44227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44229 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44233 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44254 \begin_layout Chapter
44256 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44258 name "chap:Credits"
44265 \begin_layout Standard
44266 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
44267 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
44270 \begin_layout Itemize
44273 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
44276 \begin_layout Itemize
44282 \begin_layout Itemize
44288 \begin_layout Itemize
44294 \begin_layout Itemize
44300 \begin_layout Itemize
44306 \begin_layout Itemize
44312 \begin_layout Itemize
44318 \begin_layout Itemize
44321 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
44324 \begin_layout Itemize
44330 \begin_layout Itemize
44336 \begin_layout Itemize
44342 \begin_layout Itemize
44348 \begin_layout Itemize
44354 \begin_layout Itemize
44360 \begin_layout Itemize
44366 \begin_layout Itemize
44372 \begin_layout Itemize
44374 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44383 \begin_layout Standard
44384 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
44387 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
44394 \begin_layout Bibliography
44395 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44396 LatexCommand bibitem
44403 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44406 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
44411 \begin_inset Newline newline
44415 \begin_inset Flex URL
44418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44420 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
44428 \begin_layout Bibliography
44429 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44430 LatexCommand bibitem
44431 key "latexcompanion"
44435 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
44437 The LaTeX Companion Second Edition.
44440 Addison-Wesley, 2004
44443 \begin_layout Bibliography
44444 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44445 LatexCommand bibitem
44450 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
44453 A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition.
44456 Addison-Wesley, 2003
44459 \begin_layout Bibliography
44460 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44461 LatexCommand bibitem
44468 LaTeX: A Document Preparation System.
44471 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
44474 \begin_layout Bibliography
44475 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44476 LatexCommand bibitem
44488 Addison-Wesley, 1984
44491 \begin_layout Bibliography
44492 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44493 LatexCommand bibitem
44499 \begin_inset Newline newline
44503 \begin_inset Flex URL
44506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44508 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
44516 \begin_layout Bibliography
44517 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44518 LatexCommand bibitem
44524 \begin_inset Newline newline
44528 \begin_inset Flex URL
44531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44533 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
44541 \begin_layout Bibliography
44542 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44543 LatexCommand bibitem
44549 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44551 name "Documentation"
44552 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
44561 \begin_inset Newline newline
44565 \begin_inset Flex URL
44568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44570 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
44578 \begin_layout Bibliography
44579 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44580 LatexCommand bibitem
44586 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44588 name "Documentation"
44589 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
44593 how to use the program
44598 \begin_inset Newline newline
44602 \begin_inset Flex URL
44605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44607 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
44615 \begin_layout Bibliography
44616 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44617 LatexCommand bibitem
44623 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44625 name "Documentation"
44626 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
44635 \begin_inset Newline newline
44639 \begin_inset Flex URL
44642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44644 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
44652 \begin_layout Bibliography
44653 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44654 LatexCommand bibitem
44660 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44662 name "Documentation"
44663 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
44672 \begin_inset Newline newline
44676 \begin_inset Flex URL
44679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44681 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
44689 \begin_layout Bibliography
44690 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44691 LatexCommand bibitem
44697 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44699 name "Documentation"
44700 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
44704 of the AMS LaTeX-packages:
44705 \begin_inset Newline newline
44709 \begin_inset Flex URL
44712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44714 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
44722 \begin_layout Bibliography
44723 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44724 LatexCommand bibitem
44730 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44732 name "Documentation"
44733 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
44737 of the LaTeX-package
44742 \begin_inset Index idx
44745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44746 LaTeX-packages ! caption
44752 \begin_inset Newline newline
44756 \begin_inset Flex URL
44759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44761 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
44769 \begin_layout Bibliography
44770 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44771 LatexCommand bibitem
44777 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44779 name "Documentation"
44780 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
44784 of the LaTeX-package
44789 \begin_inset Index idx
44792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44793 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
44799 \begin_inset Newline newline
44803 \begin_inset Flex URL
44806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44808 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
44816 \begin_layout Bibliography
44817 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44818 LatexCommand bibitem
44824 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44826 name "Documentation"
44827 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
44831 of the LaTeX-package
44836 \begin_inset Index idx
44839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44840 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
44846 \begin_inset Newline newline
44850 \begin_inset Flex URL
44853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44855 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
44863 \begin_layout Bibliography
44864 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44865 LatexCommand bibitem
44871 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44873 name "Documentation"
44874 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
44878 of the LaTeX-package
44883 \begin_inset Index idx
44886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44887 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
44893 \begin_inset Newline newline
44897 \begin_inset Flex URL
44900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44902 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
44910 \begin_layout Bibliography
44911 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44912 LatexCommand bibitem
44918 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44920 name "Documentation"
44921 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
44925 of the LaTeX-package
44930 \begin_inset Index idx
44933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44934 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
44940 \begin_inset Newline newline
44944 \begin_inset Flex URL
44947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44949 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
44957 \begin_layout Bibliography
44958 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
44959 LatexCommand bibitem
44965 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44967 name "Documentation"
44968 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
44972 of the LaTeX-package
44977 \begin_inset Index idx
44980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44981 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
44987 \begin_inset Newline newline
44991 \begin_inset Flex URL
44994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44996 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
45004 \begin_layout Bibliography
45005 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45006 LatexCommand bibitem
45012 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45014 name "Documentation"
45015 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
45019 of the LaTeX-package
45024 \begin_inset Index idx
45027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45028 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
45034 \begin_inset Newline newline
45038 \begin_inset Flex URL
45041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45043 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
45051 \begin_layout Bibliography
45052 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45053 LatexCommand bibitem
45059 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45061 name "Documentation"
45062 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf"
45066 of the LaTeX-package
45071 \begin_inset Index idx
45074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45075 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
45081 \begin_inset Newline newline
45085 \begin_inset Flex URL
45088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45090 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/tipa/tipaman.pdf
45098 \begin_layout Bibliography
45099 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45100 LatexCommand bibitem
45106 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45109 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
45113 how to set up LyX for Arabic:
45114 \begin_inset Newline newline
45118 \begin_inset Flex URL
45121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45123 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
45131 \begin_layout Bibliography
45132 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45133 LatexCommand bibitem
45139 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45142 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
45146 how to set up LyX for Armenian:
45147 \begin_inset Newline newline
45151 \begin_inset Flex URL
45154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45156 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
45164 \begin_layout Bibliography
45165 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45166 LatexCommand bibitem
45172 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45175 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
45179 how to set up LyX for Cyrillic languages:
45180 \begin_inset Newline newline
45184 \begin_inset Flex URL
45187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45189 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
45197 \begin_layout Bibliography
45198 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45199 LatexCommand bibitem
45205 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45208 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
45212 how to set up LyX for Farsi:
45213 \begin_inset Newline newline
45217 \begin_inset Flex URL
45220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45222 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
45230 \begin_layout Bibliography
45231 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45232 LatexCommand bibitem
45238 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45241 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
45245 how to set up LyX for Hebrew:
45246 \begin_inset Newline newline
45250 \begin_inset Flex URL
45253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45255 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
45263 \begin_layout Bibliography
45264 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45265 LatexCommand bibitem
45271 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45274 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
45278 how to set up LyX for Japanese:
45279 \begin_inset Newline newline
45283 \begin_inset Flex URL
45286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45288 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
45296 \begin_layout Bibliography
45297 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45298 LatexCommand bibitem
45304 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45307 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
45311 how to set up LyX for Latvian:
45312 \begin_inset Newline newline
45316 \begin_inset Flex URL
45319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45321 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
45329 \begin_layout Bibliography
45330 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45331 LatexCommand bibitem
45337 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45340 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
45344 how to set up LyX for Lithuanian:
45345 \begin_inset Newline newline
45349 \begin_inset Flex URL
45352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45354 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
45362 \begin_layout Bibliography
45363 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45364 LatexCommand bibitem
45370 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45373 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
45377 how to set up LyX for Mongolian:
45378 \begin_inset Newline newline
45382 \begin_inset Flex URL
45385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45387 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
45395 \begin_layout Bibliography
45396 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45397 LatexCommand bibitem
45403 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45406 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
45410 how to set up LyX for Vietnamese:
45411 \begin_inset Newline newline
45415 \begin_inset Flex URL
45418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45420 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
45428 \begin_layout Bibliography
45429 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45430 LatexCommand bibitem
45436 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45439 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
45443 about new features in
45448 \begin_inset Newline newline
45452 \begin_inset Flex URL
45455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45457 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
45465 \begin_layout Standard
45466 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
45473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45500 \begin_inset Note Note
45503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45510 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
45511 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
45512 bibliography is the second one:
45520 \begin_layout Standard
45521 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
45522 LatexCommand bibtex
45523 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
45524 options "biblio/alphadin"
45531 \begin_layout Standard
45532 The above bibliography is created from a BibTeX-database.
45535 \begin_layout Standard
45536 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
45537 LatexCommand printnomenclature
45543 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
45544 LatexCommand printindex